CNET All in One Printer Printer Fax Scanner Copier User Manual
Operating Instructions  
What Yo u C an D o Wi th This Mac hine  
Se tting Up th e Sc anner  
C onfiguring the S canner Se ttings  
Se tting O riginals  
Using the Network T WAIN S canner Fu nction  
S ending Sc an F ile by E -mail  
S ending Sc an F ile by S can to F older  
S ending Sc an F ile by S can to F TP  
S ending Sc an F iles U sing Delivery S erver  
P rinting S canned Ima ge F iles  
Appendix  
Readthsi manualcarefuly before youuse thsi product andkeepithandy for futurereference. For safe and correct use, please be sure to read  
www.cnet.ie  
the SafetyInformatoi n inthis manualbeforeusingthe machine.  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
TABLE OF CONTENTS  
Trademarks.............................................................................................................1  
Safety Information .................................................................................................2  
Safety During Operation.............................................................................................2  
Lithium Batteries (Memory Back-up)..........................................................................3  
Manuals for This Scanner .....................................................................................4  
Manuals for This Scanner ..........................................................................................4  
How to Read This Manual .....................................................................................5  
1. What You Can Do With This Machine  
Outline.....................................................................................................................7  
Network TWAIN Scanner...........................................................................................7  
Scan to E-mail............................................................................................................8  
Scan to Folder............................................................................................................9  
Scan to FTP .............................................................................................................10  
Scan to Print.............................................................................................................11  
Delivery Server.........................................................................................................12  
Guide to this Scanner..........................................................................................13  
Using Keys Displayed on the Screen.......................................................................15  
How to Interpret the Indicators.................................................................................16  
Front indicators......................................................................................................16  
Network interface indicators ..................................................................................17  
Function Settings and Standby Screens..................................................................17  
Function Priority.....................................................................................................18  
Select Method........................................................................................................19  
Standby screens....................................................................................................19  
Scanner Features Menu...........................................................................................22  
2. Setting Up the Scanner  
Checking the Scanner Location .........................................................................23  
Attaching the Control Panel Unit to the Scanner Unit......................................25  
Connecting to a Local Printer.............................................................................26  
Setting Up the Optional Accessories.................................................................28  
Installing the Image Processing Unit........................................................................28  
Inserting a Wireless LAN Card.................................................................................29  
Connecting to a Network.....................................................................................30  
Connecting to a Power Source...........................................................................31  
3. Configuring the Scanner Settings  
Outline to Use As a Network Twain Scanner ....................................................33  
Outline to Use Scan to E-mail.............................................................................34  
Outline to Use Scan to Folder.............................................................................35  
Outline to Use Scan to FTP.................................................................................37  
Outline to Use the Network Delivery..................................................................38  
Outline to Use Scan to Print ...............................................................................40  
Initial Scanner Setup ...........................................................................................41  
www.cnet.ie  
i
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Settings...................................................................................................52  
Information to Set in [System Settings].......................................................................52  
Configuring [System Settings] ....................................................................................55  
Scanner Settings..................................................................................................59  
Information to Set in [System Settings].......................................................................59  
Configuring [Send Scan Settings]................................................................................64  
Print Scan Settings..............................................................................................67  
Information to Set in [Print Scan Settings]...................................................................67  
Configuring [Print Scan Settings] ................................................................................67  
Registering Scan Settings ..................................................................................70  
Information to Register in [Send Scan Settings]..........................................................70  
Registering [Scan Settings] ........................................................................................74  
Registering Print Settings...................................................................................79  
Information to Register in [Print Settings] ..................................................................79  
Registering [Print Settings] ........................................................................................80  
Configuring Settings Using a Web Browser .....................................................84  
Accessing the Scanner ............................................................................................84  
System requirements of a client computer ............................................................84  
To access this machine from a web browser ........................................................85  
General guide to the Web Status Monitor .............................................................86  
Example Procedures Using [Configuration] Main Menu ............................................87  
Configuring [Scan Settings] .....................................................................................87  
Configuring [E-mail Address] ...................................................................................88  
Information to Register as Destination and Printer ..................................................91  
Information to register in [E-mail Address]...............................................................91  
Information to register in [File Send Path]................................................................92  
Information to register in [FTP Server].....................................................................94  
Information to register in [Printer]...........................................................................96  
Recalling the Settings ..............................................................................................98  
To recall the settings .............................................................................................98  
Creating a Backup File of All the Settings................................................................99  
Setup items to be backed-up and restored............................................................99  
To create a backup file ..........................................................................................99  
To restore settings from a backup file .................................................................100  
Installing Software............................................................................................102  
List of Files.............................................................................................................102  
Auto Run Program .................................................................................................102  
Software for Using a Network TWAIN Scanner .....................................................103  
System requirements...........................................................................................103  
Using Windows 95/98/Me, Windows XP, Windows 2000, or Windows NT 4.0 ....103  
Software for Using the Network Delivery Scanner Function ..................................104  
System requirements...........................................................................................104  
DeskTopBinder V2 Lite ..........................................................................................105  
System requirements...........................................................................................105  
SmartDeviceMonitor...............................................................................................106  
About SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin and SmartDeviceMonitor for Client .........106  
Installing SmartDeviceMonitor.............................................................................107  
www.cnet.ie  
ii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. Setting Originals  
Sizes and Weights of recommended Originals...............................................109  
The Original Sizes Available for Auto Detection ....................................................110  
Originals that Require Special Care.......................................................................111  
Original Orientation ...........................................................................................112  
Simplex Scanning ..................................................................................................113  
Settings for Print Scan in simplex scanning ........................................................114  
Duplex Scanning....................................................................................................114  
Settings for Print Scan in duplex scanning..........................................................115  
Placing the Original on the Exposure Glass...........................................................116  
Placing the Originals in the ADF ............................................................................117  
5. Using the Network TWAIN Scanner Function  
Procedure Breakdown.......................................................................................119  
Scanning Originals ............................................................................................120  
Functions of the TWAIN Driver ..............................................................................122  
6. Sending Scan File by E-mail  
Procedure Breakdown.......................................................................................123  
E-mail Content .......................................................................................................124  
Sender.................................................................................................................124  
Subject.................................................................................................................124  
File name and file type of an e-mail attachment..................................................124  
Related information .............................................................................................124  
Before Sending Scan Data................................................................................126  
Original Location ....................................................................................................126  
Original Orientation and Scanning Sides ...............................................................126  
E-mail/Send File standby screen ...........................................................................126  
Selecting Destinations and a Subject..............................................................128  
Selecting Destinations............................................................................................128  
Selecting Cc Destinations ......................................................................................130  
Selecting a Subject ................................................................................................130  
Making Scan Settings........................................................................................132  
Confirming the Scan Settings.................................................................................133  
Selecting a Sender.............................................................................................134  
Performing Scan Operation ..............................................................................135  
Starting a Scan Operation......................................................................................135  
To start with originals in the ADF.........................................................................135  
To start with an original on the exposure glass ...................................................136  
Checking Transmission Results.............................................................................137  
www.cnet.ie  
iii  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7. Sending Scan File by Scan to Folder  
Sending a Scanned File to a Registered Shared Folder ................................139  
Procedure Breakdown............................................................................................139  
Selecting a Shared Folder......................................................................................140  
Selecting a File Name............................................................................................142  
Using [Enter Custom Send File] to Send a Scanned File to  
an Unregistered Shared Folder ......................................................................143  
Procedure Breakdown............................................................................................143  
Using the Enter Custom Send File Function..........................................................144  
Scanned Image Files Sent to Shared Folders.................................................147  
File Locations.........................................................................................................147  
File Names.............................................................................................................147  
8. Sending Scan File by Scan to FTP  
Procedure Breakdown.......................................................................................149  
Selecting an FTP Server....................................................................................150  
Scanned Image Files Sent to FTP Servers ......................................................152  
File Locations.........................................................................................................152  
File Names.............................................................................................................152  
9. Sending Scan Files Using Delivery Server  
Procedure Breakdown.......................................................................................155  
Selecting Delivery Destinations .......................................................................156  
10.Printing Scanned Image Files  
Procedure Breakdown.......................................................................................159  
Before Printing Scan Data.................................................................................160  
Original Locations ..................................................................................................160  
About Paper Tray Settings.....................................................................................160  
About Print Scan Standby Screen..........................................................................160  
Printing Scan Data.............................................................................................162  
Specifying the Number of Copies...........................................................................163  
Configuring Print Settings ......................................................................................163  
Confirming the Print Settings .................................................................................165  
Selecting a Printer..................................................................................................166  
Selecting Colour/Black and White..........................................................................167  
11.Appendix  
Troubleshooting.................................................................................................169  
Error Indicators.......................................................................................................169  
When the Machine does not Work as Expected ....................................................170  
When Scanning is Not Performed as Expected.....................................................171  
www.cnet.ie  
iv  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
When an Error Message Appears..........................................................................172  
Scanner unit error message ................................................................................172  
Scan settings error messages.............................................................................173  
Send Scan (E-mail, Send File (SMB/FTP) or Delivery Server)  
operation error messages .................................................................................175  
Print Scan operation error messages..................................................................176  
Error messages displayed on the Web Status Monitor .......................................177  
Other Problems......................................................................................................177  
Cleaning..............................................................................................................180  
Cleaning the Exposure Glass, ADF Exposure Glass, White Sheet,  
and White Plate....................................................................................................180  
Cleaning the Feed Roller .......................................................................................181  
Cleaning the Document Roller ...............................................................................181  
Cleaning the Document Rolling Unit ......................................................................182  
Moving and Transporting the Scanner ............................................................183  
Moving Over Short Distance ..................................................................................183  
Transporting the Scanner.......................................................................................184  
Disposing of the Scanner..................................................................................185  
Using Wireless LAN...........................................................................................186  
Outline to Use Wireless LAN..................................................................................186  
Configuring Wireless LAN Settings........................................................................186  
E-mail Address Book Data Format and Device Tag Information...................191  
Entered Program Information.................................................................................191  
About the e-mail address information..................................................................192  
Device Tag Information..........................................................................................193  
How File Size Changes Depending on Scan Area and Resolution ...............194  
When Using this Machine as a Network TWAIN Scanner .....................................194  
When [Binary] or [Halftone] is selected .................................................................195  
When [Gray-scale] is selected...............................................................................196  
When [8 colors] or [8 colors (halftone)] is selected .................................................197  
When [256 colors] is selected ...............................................................................198  
When [16770K colors] is selected..........................................................................199  
When Using this Machine for Sending Scan Data .................................................199  
When [Black and White: Text], [Black and White: Text/Photo] or  
[Black and White: Photo] is selected.....................................................................200  
When [Black and White: Gray Scale] is selected......................................................200  
When [Color: Full Color] is selected ......................................................................201  
Options ...............................................................................................................202  
Specifications.....................................................................................................203  
Software Information.........................................................................................205  
GPL/LGPL Application Software............................................................................205  
BSD License Application Software ........................................................................205  
The Apache Software License Application Software ............................................206  
JPEG Software ......................................................................................................207  
TIFF Software ........................................................................................................208  
UCD-SNMP Software.............................................................................................209  
MD5 Software License Agreement ........................................................................211  
Expat......................................................................................................................211  
INDEX....................................................................................................... 212  
www.cnet.ie  
v
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
www.cnet.ie  
vi  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Trademarks  
Adobe, PostScript, and Acrobat are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.  
Pentium is a registered trademark of Intel Corporation.  
MS, Microsoft, and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corpora-  
tion.  
Other product names used herein are for identification purposes only and might  
be trademarks of their respective companies. We disclaim any and all rights to  
those marks.  
• The product name of Windows® 95 is Microsoft® Windows® 95  
• The product name of Windows® 98 is Microsoft® Windows® 98  
• The product name of Windows® Me is Microsoft® Windows® Millennium  
Edition (Windows Me)  
• The product names of Windows® 2000 are as follows:  
Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Professional  
Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Server  
Microsoft® Windows® 2000 Advanced Server  
• The product names of Windows® XP are as follows:  
Microsoft® Windows® XP Home Edition  
Microsoft® Windows® XP Professional  
• The product names of Windows Server™ 2003 are as follows:  
Microsoft® Windows Server™ 2003 Standard Edition  
Microsoft® Windows Server™ 2003 Enterprise Edition  
Microsoft® Windows Server™ 2003 Web Edition  
• The product names of Windows® NT 4.0 are as follows:  
Microsoft® Windows NT® Workstation 4.0  
Microsoft® Windows NT® Server 4.0  
www.cnet.ie  
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Safety Information  
When using this machine, the following safety precautions should always be fol-  
lowed.  
Safety During Operation  
In this manual, the following important symbols are used:  
R WARNING:  
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if instructions  
are not followed, could result in death or serious injury.  
R CAUTION:  
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if instructions are not  
followed, may result in minor or moderate injury or damage to property.  
R WARNING:  
•
•
Connect the Power Cord directly into a wall outlet and never use an extension cord.  
Disconnect the power plug (by pulling the plug, not the cable) if the power cable or plug  
becomes frayed or otherwise damaged.  
•
•
Turn off the power and disconnect the power plug (by pulling the plug, not the cable) if any  
of the following conditions exists:  
•
•
•
You spill something into the equipment.  
You suspect that your equipment needs service or repair.  
Your equipment's cover has been damaged.  
Disposal can take place at our authorized dealer or at appropriate collection sites.  
R CAUTION:  
•
•
Protect the equipment from dampness or wet weather, such as rain, snow, and so on.  
Unplug the Power Cord from the wall outlet before you move the equipment.  
While moving the equipment, you should take care that the Power Cord will not be dam-  
aged under the equipment.  
•
When you disconnect the power plug from the wall outlet, always pull the plug (not the ca-  
ble).  
•
•
Do not allow paper clips, staples, or other small metallic objects to fall inside the equipment.  
For environmental reasons, do not dispose of the equipment or expended supply waste at  
household waste collection points. Disposal can take place at an authorized dealer or at ap-  
propriate collection sites.  
•
•
The inside of the machine could be very hot. Do not touch the parts with a label indicating  
the "hot surface". Otherwise it could cause a personal burn.  
Our products are engineered to meet high standards of quality and functionality, and we  
recommend that you only use the expendable supplies available at an authorized dealer.  
www.cnet.ie  
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Lithium Batteries (Memory Back-up)  
R WARNING:  
•
Do not try to replace the lithium batteries by yourself. A battery of this type can explode if  
incorrectly replaced. If the lithium batteries need to be replaced, contact an authorized deal-  
er to request servicing.  
•
Never dispose of the lithium batteries by incineration. This can cause them to rupture result-  
ing in injury.  
Note  
❒ Please return used NIC boards to our authorized dealer or service representative. Your  
cooperation with our recycling activities is appreciated.  
❒ NIC boards are equipped with a lithium battery. In the case NIC boards are disposed of  
by the customer, please dispose them in accordance with national or local regulations af-  
ter separating the lithium batteries from the NIC board.  
www.cnet.ie  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Manuals for This Scanner  
Manuals for This Scanner  
The following manuals describe the operational and maintenance procedures of  
this machine.  
To enhance safe and efficient operation of this scanner, all users should read and  
follow the instructions carefully.  
❖ Quick Installation Guide  
Describes how to install the scanner.  
❖ Operating Instructions (this manual)  
Provides all of the information how to install, set up, and use the scanner. This  
manual is provided as a PDF file.  
Note  
❒ There is a CD-ROM that comes with this scanner.  
www.cnet.ie  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
How to Read This Manual  
Symbols  
The following set of symbols is used in this manual.  
R WARNING:  
This symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation that might result in  
death or serious injury when you misuse the machine without following the in-  
structions under this symbol. Be sure to read the instructions, all of which are de-  
scribed in the Safety Information section.  
R CAUTION:  
This symbol indicates a potentially hazardous situation that might result in mi-  
nor or moderate injury or property damage that does not involve personal injury  
when you misuse the machine without following the instructions under this  
symbol. Be sure to read the instructions, all of which are described in the Safety  
Information section.  
* The statements above are notes for your safety.  
Important  
If this instruction is not followed, paper might be misfed, originals might be  
damaged, or data might be lost. Be sure to read this.  
Preparation  
This symbol indicates information or preparations required prior to operating.  
Note  
This symbol indicates precautions for operation, or actions to take after abnor-  
mal operation.  
Limitation  
This symbol indicates numerical limits, functions that cannot be used together,  
or conditions in which a particular function cannot be used.  
Reference  
This symbol indicates a reference.  
[
]
Keys that appear on the machine's display panel.  
[
]
Keys and buttons that appear on the computer's display.  
{
}
Keys built into the machine's control panel.  
{
}
Keys on the computer's keyboard.  
www.cnet.ie  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
www.cnet.ie  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. What You Can Do With This  
Machine  
This section introduces various functions of this machine, and provides most ba-  
sic information such as control locations and standby screens, etc.  
Outline  
Network TWAIN Scanner  
You can use this machine as a network TWAIN scanner, by operating this ma-  
chine from a client computer on the network. Originals can be scanned with the  
same operation used for SCSI- and USB-connected scanners.  
By sharing this scanner by a number of computers, there is no trouble of allocat-  
ing a special computer for scanning, or connecting a scanner to a computer each  
time you need.  
ABK001S  
1. This machine  
2. Client computer  
The scanner can be operated using a  
TWAIN-compliant application (such as  
DeskTopBinder V2 Lite ).  
Connect this machine to a network  
(TCP/IP) using a 100BASE-TX or  
10BASE-T cable. It is possible to connect  
using an optional wireless LAN card.  
Process Flow  
A Use a TWAIN-compliant application on a "2.Client computer" to send a  
command for scanning via the network TWAIN driver.  
B Originals are scanned by "1.This machine."  
C The scan data can be edited and stored using the TWAIN-compliant appli-  
cation on the "2.Client computer."  
www.cnet.ie  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
What You Can Do With This Machine  
Scan to E-mail  
By registering e-mail addresses on this machine, you can use this machine to  
generate an e-mail message and send a scan file as an e-mail attachment.  
1
ABK002S  
1. This machine  
3. E-mail client software  
Connect this machine to a network  
(TCP/IP) using a 100BASE-TX or  
10BASE-T cable. It is possible to connect  
using an optional wireless LAN card.  
Use e-mail client software (such as Mi-  
crosoft Outlook) to receive e-mail mes-  
sages and scan file attachments that are  
generated by this machine.  
2. SMTP server  
You need to have an access to an e-mail  
server that supports SMTP (Simple Mail  
Transfer Protocol), to use “Scan to E-  
mail” function. However, it is not essen-  
tial to have an e-mail server inside the  
LAN where this machine belongs.  
Process Flow  
A Specify an e-mail destination, subject, and make necessary settings for  
scanning using the control panel of “1.This machine.”  
B Originals are scanned by “1.This machine.”  
C An e-mail message with a scan file attachment is sent to “2.SMTP server”  
from “1.This machine.”  
D The e-mail message is delivered to the specified destination’s POP server  
from “2.SMTP server”, and received by “3.E-mail client software”.  
www.cnet.ie  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Outline  
Scan to Folder  
It is possible to register Windows shared folders to this machine, as destinations  
for sending scan data. You can easily send and save scan files to a Windows  
shared folder that is registered to this machine.  
1
Note  
❒ This function is displayed as “Send File: SMB” on the display panel of this  
machine. The SMB (Server Message Block) standard, to which various oper-  
ating systems including Windows adhere, is a popular protocol for sharing  
files, folders, printers and so on.  
ABK003S  
1. This machine  
3. Client computer  
Connect this machine to a network  
(TCP/IP) using a 100BASE-TX or  
10BASE-T cable. It is possible to connect  
using an optional wireless LAN card.  
You can use a client computer on the net-  
work to perform a scan to folder opera-  
tion remotely (which requires a Web  
browser). You can also browse scanned  
files saved to a shared folder from a client  
computer.  
2. Computer with a shared folder  
To use this function, it is necessary to cre-  
ate a shared folder in advance. You can  
specify a shared folder to save scan files.  
Process Flow  
A Specify a shared folder, file name, and make necessary settings for scan-  
ning using “3.Client computer”, or the control panel of “1.This machine.”  
B Originals are scanned by “1.This machine.”  
C The scan data is saved in the specified shared folder on “2.Computer with  
a shared folder”.  
D You can use the scan data from “3.Client computer”.  
www.cnet.ie  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
What You Can Do With This Machine  
Scan to FTP  
It is possible to register FTP servers to this machine as destinations for sending  
scan data. You can easily send and save scan files to an FTP server that is regis-  
tered to this machine.  
1
ABK004S  
1. This machine  
3. Client computer  
Connect this machine to a network  
(TCP/IP) using a 100BASE-TX or  
10BASE-T cable. It is possible to connect  
using an optional wireless LAN card.  
You can browse scanned files saved to an  
FTP server from a client computer. You  
need to have an FTP client program on  
the computer to connect to an FTP server.  
2. FTP server  
You can specify an FTP server to save  
scan files. Note, however, that it is essen-  
tial to have the FTP server inside the  
LAN/WAN where this machine belongs.  
It is not possible to access an FTP server  
via a proxy server.  
Process Flow  
A Specify an FTP server, file name, and make necessary settings for scanning  
using the control panel of “1.This machine.”  
B Originals are scanned by “1.This machine.”  
C The scan data is saved in the specified folder on “2.FTP server”.  
D You can use the scan data from “3.Client computer”.  
www.cnet.ie  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Outline  
Scan to Print  
You can send scan files directly to a printer, so it is possible to use this machine  
like a copier.  
1
ABK023S  
1. This machine  
3. Network printers  
When you use a network printer, connect  
this machine to a network (TCP/IP) us-  
ing a 100BASE-TX or 10BASE-T cable. It  
is possible to connect using an optional  
wireless LAN card.  
Printers connected to a network  
(TCP/IP) using a 100BASE-TX or  
10BASE-T cable. It is necessary to assign  
a fixed IP address to each of the network  
printers.  
2. Local printer  
A printer connected to this machine us-  
ing a USB cable.  
Process Flow  
A Perform a Print Scan operation using the control panel of "1. This machine."  
B Originals are scanned by "1.This machine."  
C The scan data is interpreted to a printer language and sent to either "2.Local  
printer" or one of "3.Network printers" you specified.  
D The scan data is printed from the printer (either "2.Local printer" or one of  
"3.Network printers") you specified.  
www.cnet.ie  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
What You Can Do With This Machine  
Delivery Server  
By using ScanRouter V2 Professional/Lite, it is possible to deliver scan data that  
is scanned by this machine to multiple destinations.  
1
ABK005S  
1. This machine  
2. Delivery server  
Connect this machine to a network  
(TCP/IP) using a 100BASE-TX or  
10BASE-T cable, or using an optional  
wireless LAN card. You can connect up  
to two machines to a network where you  
have a computer (a delivery server) with  
ScanRouter V2 Lite (that comes with this  
machine) installed.  
A delivery server with ScanRouter V2  
Professional/Lite installed, which man-  
ages destinations including e-mail ad-  
dresses, shared folders, groups, etc., and  
document data files sorted by each of the  
destinations.  
3. Client computer  
You can browse document data files on a  
delivery server from a client computer,  
by using DeskTopBinder V2 Lite. You  
can also save those files on the local hard  
disk of the client computer, as necessary.  
Process Flow  
A Specify destinations, and make necessary settings for scanning using the  
control panel of “1.This machine.”  
B Originals are scanned by “1.This machine.”  
C The scan data is sent to and saved on “2.Delivery server”.  
D “2.Delivery server” performs jobs as configured, such as giving delivery  
notice to specified destinations, or storing the scan data on a specified hard  
disk, etc.  
E You can use the scan data from “3.Client computer” by using DeskTop-  
Binder V2 Lite.  
www.cnet.ie  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Guide to this Scanner  
Guide to this Scanner  
1
ADG018S  
1. Original table  
Set originals here to be loaded into this  
machine using the ADF (Automatic Doc-  
ument Feeder).  
8. {Clear Modes} key  
Press this key to return to the initial  
screen that is displayed when you turn  
the power on.  
2. ADF (Automatic Document Feed-  
9. {Clear/Stop} key  
er)  
Press this key when you want to clear the  
value that you have entered, or stop scan-  
ning currently in progress.  
Allows you to automatically load multi-  
ple originals into this machine. The ADF  
also provides duplex scanning.  
10. {Start} key  
Press this key to start scanning.  
3. Output table  
The originals that have been loaded by  
the ADF are output here after scanning.  
11. Number keys  
Used to select a menu item displayed on  
the screen, or enter numeric values.  
4. Indicators  
Indicate status of this machine.  
12. {./*} (Title) key  
Press this key to display list of titles.  
5. Power switch  
Turns this machine’s power on and off.  
13. Cursor keys ( {0} / {1} keys)  
Used to move highlight on the screen for  
selecting an option.  
6. Control panel  
Used to configure settings and operate  
this machine.  
14. Function key  
7. {User Tools} key  
Press this key to configure various set-  
tings such as send scan, print scan, net-  
Used to select functions that appear on  
the display panel of this machine. See  
p.15 “Using Keys Displayed on the  
Screen” for details.  
work, etc.  
www.cnet.ie  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
What You Can Do With This Machine  
15. Display panel  
Displays a screen for scanning opera-  
tions, settings or status information,  
along with keys that are currently availa-  
ble for the corresponding function key  
operations.  
1
ADG019S  
1. White Sheet  
Holds the original down on the exposure  
glass.  
6. Network interface connector  
For connection of an Ethernet network  
cable.  
2. Exposure glass for the ADF  
Scans originals when they are loaded in  
the ADF.  
7. SD card slot  
Used for an authorized customer engi-  
neer’s maintenance purpose only.  
3. Exposure glass  
8. PC card slot  
Place the original here when you do not  
use the ADF for scanning.  
This machine has a Type II PC card slot.  
By inserting the USB interface card that  
comes with this machine to the slot and  
connecting a USB printer, you can use the  
printer as a local printer for Print Scan.  
You can also use the slot for an optional  
wireless LAN card, instead of the USB in-  
terface card.  
4. Lock switch  
Set this switch to the “Lock” position  
when you transport this machine.  
5. Power connector  
For connection of the bundled AC power  
cord.  
www.cnet.ie  
14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Guide to this Scanner  
Using Keys Displayed on the Screen  
You can use the function keys, located under the display panel, to operate keys  
that appear on the display panel.  
1
Example:  
ADG002S  
To execute a key operation on the display panel, press the relevant function key.  
• Press A to select [Scan].  
• Press B to select [Dest.].  
• Press C to select [Sender].  
• Press D to select [PrevMenu].  
www.cnet.ie  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
What You Can Do With This Machine  
How to Interpret the Indicators  
Front indicators  
1
This section explains how to interpret the indicators of this machine.  
ADG001S  
The following table shows the status of the indicators when this machine oper-  
ates normally. If any of the indicators appear differently, it means an error. See  
p.169 “Error Indicators” to eliminate the error.  
Description  
For a short while after turning the  
power on  
Power is on  
No original is set to the original table  
No scanning operation is in progress  
Power is on  
Originals are set to the original table  
No scanning operation is in progress  
Power is on  
No original is set to the original table  
Scanning operation is in progress  
Power is on  
Originals are set to the original table  
Scanning operation is in progress  
b
Power save mode  
: On  
b : Blinking  
: Off  
www.cnet.ie  
16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Guide to this Scanner  
Network interface indicators  
The network interface connector on the rear panel of this machine is equipped  
with the following two indicators.  
1
ABK020S  
1. Green indicator  
Lights when this machine is connected to  
the network correctly.  
2. Yellow indicator  
Lights when this machine is sending/re-  
ceiving data through the network.  
Function Settings and Standby Screens  
You cannot use the following functions at the same time.  
• Network TWAIN (See p.7 “Network TWAIN Scanner” )  
• E-mail (See p.8 “Scan to E-mail” )  
• Send File (SMB) (See p.9 “Scan to Folder” )  
• Send File (FTP) (See p.10 “Scan to FTP” )  
• Delivery Server (See p.12 “Delivery Server” )  
• Print Scan (See p.11 “Scan to Print” )  
To select the functions you use, you must configure the following settings in ad-  
vance.  
• With the options in [7.Select Method], select a method that suits for the func-  
tions you want to use.  
• With the options in [Function Priority] and [1.Select Method], select the initial  
screen that is displayed when you turn the machine's power on.  
Note  
❒ [1.Select Method] and [7.Select Method] are menu items that are included in  
[2.Send Scan Settings] under Scanner Features menu, which is displayed by  
pressing the {User Tools} key. [Function Priority] is a menu item that is included  
in [1.System Settings] under Scanner Features menu.  
Reference  
p.59 “Scanner Settings” for details about how to configure the above settings.  
www.cnet.ie  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
What You Can Do With This Machine  
• Send Scan  
Function Priority  
Select this option if you hardly  
ever use Print Scan. With this op-  
tion, one of the following screens is  
displayed as the initial screen, de-  
pending on the setting in [7.Select  
Method] :  
Delivery Server standby screen, E-  
mail/Send File standby screen, or  
Network TWAIN standby screen  
If you want to print scan data  
while a Send Scan initial screen is  
displayed, press [PrevMenu] to dis-  
play the Select Method screen, and  
then press the {2} key.  
You can select the initial screen dis-  
played each time you turn the ma-  
chine's power on. It is good idea to  
select the initial screen in accordance  
with how frequently you use Print  
Scan. The following three options are  
available.  
1
• Select: Send/Print  
Select this option if you use Print  
Scan as well as Delivery Serv-  
er/Send File. On the Select Method  
screen (which is initially displayed  
when you select this option),  
pressing the {1} key displays the  
same screen as one of the Send  
Scan initial screens, and pressing  
the {2} key displays the same  
screen as the Print Scan initial  
screen.  
• Print Scan  
Select this option if you use Print  
Scan frequently. With this option,  
the Print Scan standby screen is  
displayed as the initial screen. If  
you want to use any one of the  
functions other than Print Scan  
(Delivery server, e-mail, Send File  
or Network TWAIN) while the  
Print Scan standby screen is dis-  
played, press [PrevMenu] to display  
the Select Method screen, and then  
press the {1} key. At this time, De-  
livery Server standby screen, E-  
mail/Send File standby screen, or  
Network TWAIN standby screen  
is displayed, depending on the set-  
tings in [1.Select Method] and [7.Se-  
lect Method].  
Note  
❒ Instead of pressing the number  
keys, you can also use the {0} or  
{1} key to highlight "Send Scan"  
or "Print Scan" on the screen, and  
then press [OK].  
www.cnet.ie  
18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Guide to this Scanner  
• The following table shows which  
standby screen will be displayed  
as the Send Scan initial screen in  
accordance with the settings in  
[1.Select Method] and [7.Select Meth-  
od] (which settings are included in  
[2.Send Scan Settings] ).  
Select Method  
There are two setup items named “Se-  
lect Method”: [1.Select Method] and  
[7.Select Method]. Use these items in  
combination to configure how you  
use this machine.  
1
1.Select Method  
• With the options in [7.Select Meth-  
od], you can select a combination  
of the functions that suits for the  
method how you use this machine.  
The following three options are  
available.  
Send  
TWAIN  
Delivery Delivery Network  
Server/ Server TWAIN  
TWAIN standby standby  
screen screen  
• Delivery Server/TWAIN  
Select this option if you want to  
use Delivery Server and net-  
work TWAIN. With this option,  
e-mail, Send File (SMB), and  
Send File (FTP) are not availa-  
ble.  
Send  
File/  
E-mail/ Network  
Send File TWAIN  
7.Select TWAIN standby standby  
Method  
screen  
screen  
TWAIN  
-
Network  
TWAIN  
exclu-  
sive  
standby  
screen  
• Send File/TWAIN  
Select this option if you want to  
use e-mail, Send File (SMB),  
Send File (FTP), and network  
TWAIN. With this option, De-  
livery Server is not available.  
Standby screens  
• Select Method screen  
• TWAIN  
While this screen is displayed,  
pressing the {1} key displays De-  
livery Server standby screen, E-  
mail/Send File standby screen,  
Network TWAIN standby screen,  
or Network TWAIN exclusive  
standby screen. Pressing the {2}  
key displays the Print Scan stand-  
by screen.  
Select this option if you want to  
use Network TWAIN only.  
With this option, Delivery Serv-  
er, e-mail, Send File (SMB), and  
Send File (FTP) are not availa-  
ble.  
When you start the network  
TWAIN driver from a TWAIN-  
compliant application on a client  
computer, Network TWAIN  
standby screen is displayed. Press  
[Exit] to return to the Select Method  
screen.  
www.cnet.ie  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
What You Can Do With This Machine  
• Delivery Server standby screen  
While this screen is displayed,  
pressing [Dest.] enables you to de-  
liver scan data using the address  
book in ScanRouter V2 Profession-  
al/Lite. You can also configure  
various settings using the control  
panel of this machine, or using a  
Web browser on a client computer.  
You can send any file by using a  
Web browser on a client computer;  
however, you cannot send an e-  
mail or send a file by SMB/FTP by  
using the control panel of this ma-  
chine.  
• E-mail/Send File standby screen  
While this screen is displayed,  
pressing [Dest.] enables you to  
send an e-mail or send a file by  
SMB/FTP. You can also send any  
file by using a Web browser on a  
client computer, and configure  
various settings using the control  
panel of this machine or a Web  
browser on a client computer.  
You cannot deliver scan data by  
using Delivery Server.  
1
If you want to print scan data,  
press [PrevMenu] and display the  
Select Method screen.  
When you start the network  
TWAIN driver from a TWAIN-  
compliant application on a client  
computer, Network TWAIN  
standby screen is displayed. Press  
[Exit] to return to the E-mail/Send  
File standby screen.  
When you start the network  
TWAIN driver from a TWAIN-  
compliant application on a client  
computer, Network TWAIN  
standby screen is displayed. Press  
[Exit] to return to the Delivery  
Server standby screen.  
www.cnet.ie  
20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Guide to this Scanner  
• Network TWAIN standby screen  
While this screen is displayed, you  
can use this machine as a TWAIN  
scanner, by starting the network  
TWAIN driver from a TWAIN-  
compliant application on a client  
computer. You can also configure  
various settings using the control  
panel of this machine, or using a  
Web browser on a client computer.  
When this screen is initially dis-  
played after you turn the ma-  
chine's power on, pressing [Exit]  
will display either of the following  
screens:  
• Network TWAIN exclusive stand-  
by screen  
While this screen is displayed, you  
can use this machine as a TWAIN  
scanner, by starting the network  
TWAIN driver from a TWAIN-  
compliant application on a client  
computer. You can also configure  
various settings using the control  
panel of this machine, or using a  
Web browser on a client computer.  
However, you cannot use the fol-  
lowing functions: Print Scan, De-  
livery Server, e-mail, Send File  
(SMB), Send File (FTP), sending  
any file by using a Web browser on  
a client computer.  
1
•
Delivery Server standby screen  
(when " Delivery Server/TWAIN  
" is selected for [7.Select Method  
]
option)  
• E-mail/Send File standby screen  
(when " Send File/TWAIN " is  
selected for [7.Select Method] op-  
tion)  
• Print Scan standby screen  
While this screen is displayed, you  
can print scan data.  
While Select Method screen, Deliv-  
ery Server standby screen, E-  
mail/Send File standby screen, or  
Print Scan standby screen is dis-  
played, starting the network  
TWAIN driver from a TWAIN-  
compliant application on a client  
computer will display the Net-  
work TWAIN standby screen.  
Press [Exit] to return to the previ-  
ous screen.  
If you want to use any other func-  
tions such as Delivery Server, e-  
mail or Send File (SMB/FTP),  
press [PrevMenu] and display the  
Select Method screen. At this time,  
functions you can use changes de-  
pending on the settings in [1.Select  
Method] and [7.Select Method].  
When you start the network  
TWAIN driver from a TWAIN-  
compliant application on a client  
computer, Network TWAIN  
standby screen is displayed. Press  
[Exit] to return to the Print Scan  
standby screen.  
www.cnet.ie  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
What You Can Do With This Machine  
Scanner Features Menu  
Pressing the {User Tools} key displays  
the Scanner Features menu. You can  
configure settings for network, Send  
Scan, Print Scan, and Scan/Print con-  
ditions to meet your requirements.  
1
www.cnet.ie  
22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2. Setting Up the Scanner  
This section explains how to setup the scanner to get it ready for use, and how  
to make necessary connections.  
Checking the Scanner Location  
Before setting up the scanner, take a  
few minutes to check the location  
where you are going to install the  
scanner.  
❖ Installation space  
Make sure that the scanner is in a  
location where there is enough  
space to provide the clearance as il-  
lustrated below, and also provide a  
comfortable working area in the  
front.  
R WARNING:  
•
Make sure the wall outlet is near the ma-  
chine and easily accessible so that in  
event of an emergency it can be un-  
plugged easily.  
R CAUTION:  
•
Keep the machine away from humidity  
and dust. A fire or an electric shock  
might occur.  
•
Do not place the machine on an unstable  
or tilted surface. If it topples over, it  
could cause injury.  
ADG020S  
• Place the scanner on a level, stable,  
vibrating-free surface. Allowable  
inclination of the surface for instal-  
lation is within 5mm (0.2”) (when  
measuring difference of heights  
between an end and the other end  
of this machine, compared to a lev-  
el surface).  
ADG021S  
www.cnet.ie  
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Setting Up the Scanner  
❖ Installation environment  
Important  
❒ Save the box and cushioning mate-  
rial in which the scanner was  
packed so that they can be used if  
it is necessary to transport the  
scanner in the future.  
Important  
❒ Do not set up the scanner in any  
of the following types of loca-  
tions. Doing so creates the risk  
of malfunction of the scanner.  
❒ When the machine is moved from  
a cold location to a warm location,  
sudden temperature changes  
cause condensation inside of the  
scanner. Wait one hour or more be-  
fore turning on the scanner to al-  
low the condensation to evaporate.  
• In a location exposed to di-  
2
rect sunlight  
• In a location where the scan-  
ner will be subjected to blow-  
ing air or radiant heat, such  
as near an air conditioner or  
heater  
• In a location near other elec-  
tronic devices, such as a ra-  
dio or television set  
• In a location subject to ex-  
treme temperatures or hu-  
midity  
• Near a humidifier  
Set up the scanner in a location  
where the temperature and hu-  
midity will fall within the ranges  
shown below.  
ADG022S  
www.cnet.ie  
24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Attaching the Control Panel Unit to the Scanner Unit  
Attaching the Control Panel Unit to the  
Scanner Unit  
❒ Locating the scanner unit at an  
Note  
end of a desk makes it easy to  
❒ Use the tool that comes with this  
attach the control panel unit.  
machine when you tighten or loos-  
2
en the screws.  
B
Insert the hooks of the control  
panel unit to the scanner unit.  
A Insert the plug of the control pan-  
el unit into the socket on the scan-  
ner unit, as illustrated below.  
ZDLp330  
C
Secure the control panel unit us-  
ing the screw that comes with this  
machine.  
ABK011S  
Important  
❒ While making sure that the plug  
is facing in the correct direction,  
inset the plug as far as it goes  
into the socket. It may be a bit  
tight to insert the plug into the  
socket, so push the plug with a  
strength that is enough for in-  
serting it in place.  
Note  
ZDLp340  
❒ To avoid the plug being insert-  
ed in the wrong direction, the  
socket has a number of tiny  
prongs inside of it. When you  
insert the plug into the socket,  
make sure that the socket is fac-  
ing in the correct direction. In-  
serting in the wrong direction  
creates the risk of damage to the  
plug and the socket.  
Note  
❒ Do not open the cover located at  
the lower left of the control pan-  
el. Changing configuration of  
the switches inside of the cover  
could cause this machine to stop  
operating normally.  
❒ Be careful not to pinch the cable  
when you attach the control  
www.cnet.ie  
panel unit to the scanner unit.  
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Setting Up the Scanner  
Connecting to a Local Printer  
You can make a USB connection be-  
C
Connect a USB cable to one of the  
USB ports of the USB interface  
card.  
tween this machine and a printer,  
when you want to use it as a local  
printer for Print Scan. This section ex-  
plains how to connect a printer to this  
machine using a USB cable.  
D
Connect the other end of the USB  
cable to the USB port of the print-  
er.  
2
Note  
❒ When you connect a local printer  
to this machine, be sure to use the  
USB cable that comes with this ma-  
chine.  
❒ See the manuals that come with the  
printer you are going to connect to  
this machine, for details about the  
printer’s connections and setup in-  
formation.  
ADG007S  
A Turn off the power of this ma-  
Important  
chine.  
❒ You cannot use more than one  
printer as a local printer for  
Print Scan at the same time.  
When you connect two or more  
printers to the machine using  
USB cables, the printer that is  
detected by this machine first is  
only available.  
B Insert the USB interface card that  
comes with this machine to the  
PC Card slot on the rear panel of  
this machine.  
ADG006S  
Note  
❒ Make sure that the card is se-  
curely inserted, until you feel  
the card click into place.  
Important  
❒ If you remove the USB interface  
card while the machine’s power  
is on, it is necessary to restart  
www.cnet.ie  
the machine.  
26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Connecting to a Local Printer  
1. Prong holes  
2. Prongs  
E Attach the card slot cover that  
comes with this machine.  
C Insert the prongs to the prong  
holes, and then push both  
sides of the card slot cover un-  
til it is secured to the rear panel  
of this machine.  
To attach the card slot cover  
A Reeve the USB cable through  
one of the slits of the card slot  
cover.  
2
ADG010S  
ADG008S  
Note  
❒ When you connect two print-  
ers to this machine, reeve one  
of the USB cables through a  
slit, and the other USB cable  
through the other slit.  
❒ This step is not necessary  
when you use an optional  
wireless LAN card instead of  
the USB interface card.  
B Align the two prongs of the  
card slot cover with the two  
prong holes located at the up-  
per left and right of the PC card  
slot.  
1
2
ADG009S  
www.cnet.ie  
27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Setting Up the Scanner  
Setting Up the Optional Accessories  
C
Pull out the scanner control unit.  
Installing the Image  
Processing Unit  
Important  
2
❒
Before touching the Image Process-  
ing Unit, be sure to touch any metal  
object in order to discharge static  
electricity from you body.  
Note  
ADG003S  
❒ Use the tool that comes with this  
machine when you tighten or loos-  
en the screws.  
Important  
❒ The scanner control unit is very  
heavy. Be careful not to drop it  
when removing.  
A
Turn off the power of this ma-  
chine, and unplug all the cables  
connected to this machine includ-  
ing the power cord.  
D
Insert the connector located on  
the back of the Image Processing  
Unit to the socket on the scanner  
control unit, and then secure the  
Image Processing Unit using the  
screw that comes with it.  
B
Remove the four screws at the  
bottom of the rear panel of this  
machine.  
ABK012S  
ADG023S  
E
F
Confirm that the Image Process-  
ing Unit is securely fastened, and  
make sure that there is no foreign  
objects on the scanner control  
unit.  
Replace the scanner control unit  
into the scanner unit, and then se-  
cure it with the four screws.  
www.cnet.ie  
28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Setting Up the Optional Accessories  
G Connect the cables that you have C Attach the card slot cover that  
unplugged in step . Be sure to  
comes with this machine.  
A
connect the power cord last of all.  
Reference  
See p.27 “To attach the card slot  
cover” for information about  
how to attach the card slot cov-  
er.  
Inserting a Wireless LAN Card  
Note  
2
❒ You cannot use the optional wire-  
less LAN card and the bundled  
USB interface card at the same  
time.  
A Turn off the power of this ma-  
chine.  
B Insert the wireless LAN card to  
the PC Card slot on the rear panel  
of this machine.  
ADG005S  
Note  
❒ Only a single side of the wire-  
less LAN card has three hori-  
zontal lines, which is located on  
the black end of the card. When  
you insert the card, make sure  
that the side with the three lines  
is facing up. Inserting in the  
wrong direction creates the risk  
of damage to the card and the  
card slot.  
❒ Make sure that the card is se-  
curely inserted, until you feel  
the card click into place.  
www.cnet.ie  
29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Setting Up the Scanner  
Connecting to a Network  
This section explains how to connect  
Note  
this machine to a network.  
❒ When you use this machine in  
North America, insert an end of  
the network cable into the net-  
work interface connector of this  
machine.  
Important  
❒ Use a 100BASE-TX (category 5) or  
10BASE-T network cable when  
you connect this machine to a net-  
work.  
2
C
Insert the other end of the net-  
work cable into an appropriate  
connector of a network device,  
such as an Ethernet hub.  
A
With the network cable you use  
for connection, create a single  
loop about 15cm (6”)(A) away  
from an end of the cable, and then  
attach the ferrite core that comes  
with this machine as illustrated  
below.  
Note  
❒ Skip this step when you use this  
machine in North America.  
B
Insert the network cable’s end  
that has the ferrite core into the  
network interface connector of  
this machine.  
ADG004S  
www.cnet.ie  
30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Connecting to a Power Source  
Connecting to a Power Source  
This section explains how to connect  
Important  
this machine to a power source, using  
❒ Be sure to set the lock switch to  
“Unlock”. Turning on the pow-  
er with the lock switch set to  
“Lock” could result in failure in  
scanning or malfunction of this  
machine.  
the bundled AC power cord.  
R WARNING:  
•
Do not use with a power source with a  
voltage different from the specified volt-  
age. Do not use a power outlet with mul-  
tiple devices plugged in. These could  
create the risk of fire or electric shock.  
2
C
Push the power cord plug all the  
way into the power connector on  
this machine.  
•
•
Avoid the use of an extension cord.  
Do not damage, break, twist or modify  
the Power Cord. Placing heavy objects  
on the cord, pulling on or bending it ex-  
cessively can damage the Power Cord,  
creating the risk of fire or electric shock.  
•
Never touch or unplug the power plug  
with wet hands. This can create the risk  
of electric shock.  
R CAUTION:  
•
When unplugging from an outlet, be  
ADG024S  
sure to grasp the plug when pulling.  
Never pull on the cord. This could dam-  
age the cord creating the risk of fire or  
electrical shock.  
Note  
❒ Be sure to use the power cord  
that comes with this machine.  
A Confirm that the power switch is  
D
Insert the power plug into the  
power outlet.  
set to off.  
B Confirm that the lock switch lo-  
cated on the left side of the ma-  
chine is set to the “Unlock”  
position.  
ZDLH350  
www.cnet.ie  
31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Setting Up the Scanner  
-Before turning off the power  
Before you turn off the power of this  
machine, make sure that a standby  
screen is displayed on the display  
panel.  
If you turn off the power while the  
Scanner Features menu is displayed,  
all the settings that you have config-  
ured could be discarded, and this ma-  
chine could return to its factory  
default status.  
2
You should also confirm that B is not  
displayed on the screen, or the B in-  
dicator on the front of this machine is  
not lit, when you turn off the power.  
Otherwise, loss of scan data or failure  
in sending files might occur.  
www.cnet.ie  
32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3. Configuring the Scanner  
Settings  
Outline to Use As a Network Twain  
Scanner  
The following overview diagram shows the preparation steps for using this ma-  
chine as a network TWAIN scanner. Note that the underlined steps are essential.  
See p.52 “System Set-  
Configure [1.System Settings] on this machine  
tings”  
See p.103 “Software for  
Install the network TWAIN driver on a client computer Using a Network  
TWAIN Scanner”.  
*1  
If you use this machine as a network TWAIN scanner, you need a TWAIN-compliant  
application on the client computer you use. DeskTopBinder V2 Lite that comes with  
this machine is a TWAIN-compliant application.  
www.cnet.ie  
33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Configuring the Scanner Settings  
Outline to Use Scan to E-mail  
The following overview diagram shows the preparation steps for sending scan  
files as e-mail attachments. Note that the underlined steps are essential.  
Reference  
There are three types of setup items: 1) items that you can configure settings  
using the control panel of this machine, 2) items that you can configure set-  
tings using a Web browser on a client computer, 3) items that you can config-  
ure settings using both of the above. See p.41 “Initial Scanner Setup” for  
details. This manual covers only the setting procedures that you can perform  
using the control panel of this machine. For details about settings this manual  
does not cover, see the Web Status Monitor Help. For information about how  
to view the Web Status Monitor, see p.84 “Accessing the Scanner”  
3
Configure [1.System Settings] on this ma-  
See p.52 “System Settings”  
chine  
Configure [General Settings] on the Web Status See the Web Status Monitor Help.  
Monitor  
Configure [2.SendScan Settings] and [4.Scan See p.59 “Scanner Settings”.  
Settings] on this machine or on the Web Status  
Monitor  
Configure [Custom Title] settings on the Web See the Web Status Monitor Help.  
Status Monitor.  
See p.88 “Configuring [E-mail Ad-  
dress]”  
Configure [E-mail], register [E-mail Address] and p.91 “Information to register in [E-  
and [Subject] on the Web Status Monitor  
mail Address]”  
See the Web Status Monitor Help for  
details about [E-mail] and [Subject].  
See p.98 “Recalling the Settings” for  
details.  
Recall the Settings on the Web Status Monitor  
www.cnet.ie  
34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Outline to Use Scan to Folder  
Outline to Use Scan to Folder  
The following overview diagram shows the preparation steps for sending scan  
files to shared folders of Windows using SMB protocol. Note that the underlined  
steps are essential.  
3
www.cnet.ie  
35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuring the Scanner Settings  
Reference  
There are three types of setup items: 1) items that you can configure settings  
using the control panel of this machine, 2) items that you can configure set-  
tings using a Web browser on a client computer, 3) items that you can config-  
ure settings using both of the above. See p.41 “Initial Scanner Setup” for  
details.  
This manual covers only the setting procedures that you can perform using  
the control panel of this machine. For details about settings this manual does  
not cover, see the Web Status Monitor Help. For information about how to  
view the Web Status Monitor, see p.84 “Accessing the Scanner”.  
3
Create a shared folder on a Windows compu- See Windows Help.  
ter  
See p.52 “System Settings”  
Configure [1.System Settings] on this ma-  
chine  
Configure [General Settings] on the Web Status See the Web Status Monitor Help.  
Monitor  
Configure [2.SendScan Settings] and [4.Scan See p.59 “Scanner Settings”.  
Settings] on this machine or on the Web Status  
Monitor  
Configure [Custom Title] settings on the Web See the Web Status Monitor Help.  
Status Monitor.  
See p.92 “Information to register in  
[File Send Path]”  
*1  
Configure [Send File], register [File Send Path]  
and [File Name] on the Web Status Monitor  
See the Web Status Monitor Help for  
details about [Send File] and [File Name].  
See p.98 “Recalling the Settings” for  
details.  
Recall the Settings on the Web Status Monitor  
*1  
This setting becomes essential if you want to perform Scan to Folder (SMB) operation  
from this machine. When you perform [Enter Custom Send File] operation using the  
Web Status Monitor, it is not necessary to register [File Send Path] in advance.  
www.cnet.ie  
36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Outline to Use Scan to FTP  
Outline to Use Scan to FTP  
The following overview diagram shows the preparation steps for sending scan  
files to folders on an FTP server. Note that the underlined steps are essential.  
Reference  
There are three types of setup items: 1) items that you can configure settings  
using the control panel of this machine, 2) items that you can configure set-  
tings using a Web browser on a client computer, 3) items that you can config-  
ure settings using both of the above. See p.41 “Initial Scanner Setup” for  
details.  
3
This manual covers only the setting procedures that you can perform using  
the control panel of this machine. For details about settings this manual does  
not cover, see the Web Status Monitor Help. For information about how to  
view the Web Status Monitor, See p.84 “Accessing the Scanner”  
Configure [1.System Settings] on this ma-  
See p.52 “System Settings”  
chine  
Configure [General Settings] on the Web Status See the Web Status Monitor Help.  
Monitor  
Configure [2.SendScan Settings] and [4.Scan See p.59 “Scanner Settings”  
Settings] on this machine or on the Web Status  
Monitor  
Configure [Custom Title] settings on the Web See the Web Status Monitor Help.  
Status Monitor.  
See p.94 “Information to register in  
[FTP Server]”.  
Configure [File Send], register [FTP Server]  
and [File Name] on the Web Status Monitor  
See the Web Status Monitor Help for  
details about [File Send] and [File Name].  
See p.98 “Recalling the Settings” for  
details.  
Recall the Settings on the Web Status Monitor  
www.cnet.ie  
37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuring the Scanner Settings  
Outline to Use the Network Delivery  
The following overview diagram shows the preparation steps to use this ma-  
chine as a network delivery scanner, which function is enabled using ScanRout-  
er V2 Professional/Lite. Note that the underlined steps are essential.  
3
www.cnet.ie  
38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Outline to Use the Network Delivery  
Reference  
There are three types of setup items: 1) items that you can configure settings  
using the control panel of this machine, 2) items that you can configure set-  
tings using a Web browser on a client computer, 3) items that you can config-  
ure settings using both of the above. See p.41 “Initial Scanner Setup” for  
details.  
This manual covers only the setting procedures that you can perform using  
the control panel of this machine. For details about settings this manual does  
not cover, see the Web Status Monitor Help. For information about how to  
view the Web Status Monitor, see p.84 “Accessing the Scanner”  
3
Install ScanRouter V2 Professional/Lite on a See the manuals for ScanRouter V2  
computer used as a network delivery server, Professional/Lite or ScanRouter V2  
and make necessary settings  
Professional/Lite Help.  
Install DeskTopBinder V2  
See DeskTopBinder V2 Lite Help or  
the manuals for DeskTopBinder V2  
Lite.  
Lite on a client computer, and make necessary  
settings  
Configure [1.System Settings] on this ma-  
See p.52 “System Settings”  
chine  
Configure [General Settings] on the Web Status See the Web Status Monitor Help.  
Monitor  
Configure [2.SendScan Settings] and [4.Scan See p.59 “Scanner Settings”  
Settings] on this machine or on the Web Status  
Monitor  
Configure [Delivery Settings] on the Web Status See the Web Status Monitor Help.  
Monitor.  
See p.98 “Recalling the Settings” for  
Recall the Settings on the Web Status Monitor  
details.  
See the manuals for ScanRouter V2  
Professional/Lite or ScanRouter V2  
Professional/Lite Help.  
*1  
Register this machine using ScanRouter V2  
Professional/Lite  
*1  
Enter the IP address directly using [Set I/O Device].  
www.cnet.ie  
39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuring the Scanner Settings  
Outline to Use Scan to Print  
The following overview diagram shows the preparation steps for printing scan  
data by Print Scan. Note that the underlined steps are essential.  
Reference  
There are three types of setup items: 1) items that you can configure settings  
using the control panel of this machine, 2) items that you can configure set-  
tings using a Web browser on a client computer, 3) items that you can config-  
ure settings using both of the above. See p.41 “Initial Scanner Setup” for  
details.  
3
This manual covers only the setting procedures that you can perform using  
the control panel of this machine. For details about settings this manual does  
not cover, see the Web Status Monitor Help. For information about how to  
view the Web Status Monitor, see p.84 “Accessing the Scanner”  
Configure [1.System Settings] on this ma-  
See p.52 “System Settings”  
chine *1  
Configure [2.SendScan Settings] on this ma- See p.59 “Scanner Settings”  
chine or on the Web Status Monitor  
See p.96 “Information to register in  
[Printer]”  
Configure [Printer] and [Custom Title] settings  
on the Web Status Monitor  
See the Web Status Monitor Help for  
details about Custom Title settings.  
Configure [General Settings] on the Web Status See the Web Status Monitor Help.  
Monitor  
Configure [3.PrintScanSettings] and [5.Print Set- See p.67 “Print Scan Settings” and p.70  
tings] on this machine or on the Web Status  
“Registering Scan Settings”  
Monitor  
See p.98 “Recalling the Settings” for  
details.  
Recall the Settings on the Web Status Monitor  
*1  
This step is essential only when you use a network printer. This step is not essential  
when you use a local printer.  
www.cnet.ie  
40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Initial Scanner Setup  
Initial Scanner Setup  
The table on the next page shows all the setup items and their factory default val-  
ues. The table also includes information about for which of the functions each of  
the setup items is used (see the columns under "Purpose"), and the available  
method for configuration (see the columns under "Method").  
For information about how to configure each of the setup items and how it  
works, see the sections from p.52 “System Settings” to p.84 “Configuring Set-  
tings Using a Web Browser”, and also see the Web Status Monitor Help.  
Important  
3
❒ Under "Purpose" in the table on the next page, there is a column for each of  
the functions listed below.  
Column name:  
Delivery Server  
Means the function for:  
Sending scan files by a delivery server using ScanRouter V2  
Professional/Lite.  
Mail  
Sending scan files as e-mail attachments.  
Sending scan files to a Windows shared folder.  
Sending scan files to an FTP server.  
Printing scan files.  
SMB  
FTP  
Print  
TWAIN  
Using this machine as a network TWAIN scanner.  
• A “ ” in a column means that the setup item to the left is essential to use  
the function. Be sure to configure these settings before using this machine.  
• A “b” in a column means that the setup item to the left is related to the  
function, but is not essential. Configure these settings as necessary.  
• No mark in a column means that the setup item to the left has no direct re-  
lation to the function.  
❒ Under "Method" in the table on the next page, there is a column for each of  
the setup method listed below.  
Column name:  
Scanner  
Means if:  
Each of the setup items to the left can be configured using the  
control panel of this machine.  
Web  
Each of the setup items to the left can be configured using the  
Web Status Monitor.  
• A “b” in a column means that the setup item to the left can be configured  
using the method.  
• A "x" in a column means that the setup item to the left cannot be configured  
using the method. Use the other available method for the setting.  
• A "-" in a column means that the item to the left cannot be changed (for the  
display information purpose only).  
www.cnet.ie  
41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Configuring the Scanner Settings  
❒ A "(null)" in the "Factory default value" column means that the setup item to  
the left has no factory default value.  
Purpose  
Method  
Factory  
Default  
Value  
De-  
livery  
Serv-  
er  
Setup Item  
TW Scan  
Mail SMB FTP Print  
Web  
AIN  
ner  
Basic Settings  
Gen- DeviceName RNP******  
eral  
b
b
b
b
×
b
*1  
Set-  
tings  
3
Comment  
URL Name  
URL  
(null)  
URL  
×
×
×
b
b
b
/cgi-bin  
/url.cgi/  
Help URL  
/cgi-bin  
/help.cgi  
×
b
Sys-  
tem  
Set-  
tings  
or  
Function Pri- Select:  
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
×
ority  
Send/Print  
LAN Type  
IP Address  
Ethernet  
b
b
b
b
b
*3  
*3  
*3  
*3  
*3  
*4  
*3  
b *5  
11.22.33.44  
TCP  
/IP  
*2  
*3  
*3  
*3  
*3  
*3  
*3  
*3  
*3  
*3  
*4  
*3  
*3  
Subnet Mask 0.0.0.0  
b
b
b
b
b
b
*3  
Default Gate- 0.0.0.0  
way Address  
*4  
Access Con- 0.0.0.0  
trol  
b
b
Access Mask 0.0.0.0  
b
b
b
DNS Server 1 (null)  
IP Address  
×
DNS Server 2 (null)  
IP Address  
b
×
×
b
b
DNS Server 3 (null)  
IP Address  
b
*6  
*7  
Delivery  
Server IP Ad-  
dress  
0.0.0.0  
*8  
b
MAC Ad-  
dress  
(Unique to  
each unit)  
b
b
b *4  
b *4  
Network  
Boot  
NONE  
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
Transmis-  
sion Speed  
Auto  
b
b
b
www.cnet.ie  
42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Initial Scanner Setup  
Purpose  
Method  
Factory  
Default  
Value  
De-  
livery  
Serv-  
er  
Setup Item  
TW Scan  
Web  
Mail SMB FTP Print  
AIN  
ner  
b *4  
Sys-  
tem  
Set-  
tings  
or  
Communica- 802.11 Ad  
b
b
b
b
b
×
b
*9  
hoc mode  
ASSID  
11  
tion Mode  
b *4  
b *4  
*9 , *10  
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
×
×
b
b
SSID  
*9 ,  
Channel  
*11  
TCP  
/IP  
*2  
3
b *4  
b *4  
WEP Setting Disable  
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
×
×
b
b
*9  
*9 ,  
(null)  
WEP Key  
*12  
Wireless  
LAN Signal  
(Display  
only)  
×
public *14  
admin *15  
(null) *16  
SNMP Community  
b
b
b
b
b
*13  
Name  
Access Type read-only  
×
b
*14  
read-write  
*15  
Not Acces-  
*16  
sible  
Protocol  
TCP/IP  
0.0.0.0  
b
b
×
×
b
Manager IP  
Address  
Pass- Current Pass- (null)  
word word  
×
×
b
b
New Pass-  
word and  
Confirm  
(null)  
Password  
Scan Scan Type  
Bina-  
b
b
b
b
b
b
Set-  
ry:Text  
tings  
*17  
Resolution  
100dpi  
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
Scan Size  
Auto De-  
tect  
Image Density  
4
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
Noise Reduc- Off  
tion  
www.cnet.ie  
43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring the Scanner Settings  
Purpose  
Method  
TW Scan  
Factory  
De-  
livery  
Serv-  
er  
Setup Item  
Default  
Value  
Mail SMB FTP Print  
Web  
AIN  
ner  
Scan Edge  
Off  
b
b
b
b
b
b
Set-  
Smoothing  
tings  
*17  
Filter  
None  
Off  
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
×
Inversion  
Erase Colour Green  
3
File Type  
SinglePage  
: 1 Sided  
Original Set-  
tings  
b
Print Scan Type  
Text  
b
b
b
b
b
b
Set-  
Image Densi-  
tings  
4
ty  
*17  
Original Size Auto De-  
tect  
b
b
b
b
b
b
Duplex  
1 Sided  
Orig. -> 1  
Sided Print  
Reduce/En- 100%  
large, Zoom  
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
×
Create Mar-  
gin  
Off  
Quali-  
Speed  
×
ty/Speed  
Scan- Function Pri- Send File  
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
ner  
ority (Web  
Status Moni-  
tor), Select  
Method  
(Scanner)  
TWAIN  
Standby  
Time  
Off  
Off  
b
b
b
Auto Reset  
Timer  
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
Date/Time  
(Current  
time)  
Compres-  
sion (Black  
and White)  
On  
www.cnet.ie  
44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Initial Scanner Setup  
Purpose  
Method  
Factory  
Default  
Value  
De-  
livery  
Serv-  
er  
Setup Item  
TW Scan  
Web  
Mail SMB FTP Print  
AIN  
ner  
Scan- Compres-  
Normal  
Compres-  
sion  
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
ner  
sion (Gray  
Scale/Full  
Colour)  
Function Op- Send  
b
b
b
b
tions (Web  
Status Moni-  
tor), Select  
Method  
File/TWAI  
N
3
(Scanner)  
Auto Update Off  
Destination  
List  
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
Unit of Meas- mm  
ure  
sRGB  
Off  
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
End of Scan  
Option  
Clear Set-  
tings after  
Each Scan  
Job  
Border Erase 0mm  
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
Language Se- English  
lect  
b
b
ADF Thin  
Paper  
Off  
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
*7  
Job Delivery On (1MB)  
Data Max.  
×
Setting  
Wait Time  
for Addition-  
al Scanning  
3 second(s)  
b
b
b
b
b
b
×
b
Select Title  
Time Zone  
Scanned  
Alphabets  
GMT  
b
b
b
×
×
b
b
×
(Display  
Sheet Coun- only)  
ter  
Scanned  
PageCounter only)  
(Display  
×
×
ADF Pad  
Counter  
(Display  
only)  
www.cnet.ie  
45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring the Scanner Settings  
Purpose  
Method  
Factory  
De-  
livery  
Serv-  
er  
Setup Item  
Default  
Value  
TW Scan  
AIN ner  
Mail SMB FTP Print  
Web  
Scan- ADF Pick  
(Display  
×
ner  
Roller Coun- only)  
ter  
*18  
Firmware  
Version  
(Display  
only)  
×
×
Cus- Custom Title  
1
2
3
4
5
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
3
tom  
Title  
1:  
Custom Title  
2:  
×
Custom Title  
3:  
×
Custom Title  
4:  
×
Custom Title  
5:  
×
File Send Settings  
File  
IntervalTime Off  
b
b
×
b
Send for Resend-  
ing  
No. of Times Off  
to Resend  
b
b
b
b
×
×
b
b
Job Delivery Off  
Data Max.  
Setting  
File Name + On  
Time  
b
b
b
b
×
×
b
b
Create De-  
vice Name  
Folder  
On  
File  
Send  
Path  
*19  
Program No. (Automati-  
cally as-  
b
b
×
×
b
b
signed)  
File Send  
(null)  
Path Name  
Key Display (null)  
b
b
×
×
b
b
Assign Title : ABC  
Alphabet  
Assign Title :  
Custom Title  
1
b
×
b
www.cnet.ie  
46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Initial Scanner Setup  
Purpose  
Mail SMB FTP Print  
b
Method  
Factory  
Default  
Value  
De-  
livery  
Serv-  
er  
Setup Item  
TW Scan  
Web  
AIN  
ner  
File  
Assign Title : On  
×
b
Send Frequently  
Path Used Title(s)  
*19  
File Send  
Path  
(null)  
(null)  
(null)  
(null)  
×
×
×
×
×
b
b
b
b
b
Login User  
Name  
3
Login Pass-  
word  
Protected  
Password  
FTP  
Serv-  
er  
Program No. (Automati-  
cally as-  
b
b
*19  
signed)  
FTP Server  
Name  
(null)  
×
b
Key Display (null)  
b
b
×
×
b
b
Assign Title : ABC  
Alphabet  
Assign Title :  
Custom Title  
1
b
b
×
×
b
b
Assign Title : On  
Frequently  
Used Title(s)  
Server  
(null)  
×
b
Name/Path  
Name  
Login User  
Name  
(null)  
(null)  
×
×
×
b
b
b
Login Pass-  
word  
PASV Mode Off  
Configura-  
tion  
b
Protected  
Password  
(null)  
×
×
b
b
File  
Name  
*20  
File Name  
(null)  
b
b
www.cnet.ie  
47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring the Scanner Settings  
Purpose  
Method  
Factory  
De-  
livery  
Serv-  
er  
Setup Item  
Default  
Value  
TW Scan  
AIN ner  
Mail SMB FTP Print  
Web  
E-mail Settings  
E-  
POP Server  
(null)  
110  
b
b
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
b
b
b
b
b
b
b
mail Address  
POP Server  
Port No.  
3
SMTP Server (null)  
Address  
SMTP Server 25  
Port No.  
b
b
Domain  
Name  
(null)  
Authentica-  
tion Method  
Off  
Authentica-  
tion User  
Name  
(null)  
Authentica-  
tion Pass-  
word  
(null)  
×
×
b
b
Sender's  
Name De-  
fault  
Adminis-  
trator's Ad-  
dress  
b
Administra- (null)  
tor's Name  
b
b
×
×
b
b
Administra-  
tor's E-mail  
Address  
(null)  
IntervalTime 30  
for Resend-  
ing E-mails  
b
b
b
×
×
×
b
b
b
No. of Times  
to Resend E-  
mails  
1
Max. E-mail Off  
Size  
www.cnet.ie  
48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Initial Scanner Setup  
Purpose  
Mail SMB FTP Print  
b
Method  
Factory  
Default  
Value  
De-  
livery  
Serv-  
er  
Setup Item  
TW Scan  
Web  
AIN  
ner  
E-  
mail  
Ad-  
Program No. (Automati-  
cally as-  
×
b
signed)  
dress  
*21  
Name  
(null)  
b
b
b
×
×
×
b
b
b
Key Display (null)  
3
Assign Title : ABC  
Alphabet  
Assign Title :  
Custom Title  
1
b
b
×
×
b
b
Assign Title : On  
Frequently  
Used Title(s)  
E-mail Ad-  
dress  
(null)  
b
b
b
b
b
×
×
×
×
×
b
b
b
b
b
Register as  
Sender  
On  
Sender's  
Password  
On  
Protected  
Password  
(null)  
(null)  
At-  
Subject  
tach  
Sub-  
ject  
Delivery Settings  
*6  
*22  
De-  
liv-  
ery  
Delivery  
Server IP Ad-  
dress  
0.0.0.0  
Off  
Interval Time  
for Redelivery  
b
b
b
×
×
b
b
b
No. of Times Off  
to Redeliver  
b *23  
Job Delivery On (1 MB )  
Data Max.  
Setting  
www.cnet.ie  
49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring the Scanner Settings  
Purpose  
Method  
Factory  
De-  
livery  
Serv-  
er  
Setup Item  
Default  
Value  
TW Scan  
AIN ner  
Mail SMB FTP Print  
Web  
Print Scan Settings  
Print Max.  
Scan Number of  
Copies  
999  
b
b
b
b
×
b
Color/Black Black and  
and White White  
×
×
b
b
3
Print- Program No. (Automati-  
b
*24  
cally as-  
signed)  
er  
PrinterName (null)  
b
b
b
×
×
×
b
b
b
Key Display (null)  
Assign Title : ABC  
Alphabet  
Assign Title :  
Custom Title  
1
b
b
×
×
b
b
Assign Title : On  
Frequently  
Used Title(s)  
Attachment  
Type  
Network  
Printer  
b
×
×
×
b
b
b
Printer IP  
Address  
11.22.33.44  
*25  
Default  
Printer  
b
No  
Locked Print Off  
b
b
×
×
b
b
Paper Source Auto  
Tray  
*1  
****** is the last six digits of the machine's MAC address.  
*2  
[1.System Settings] on this machine, and [TCP/IP] under [Basic Settings] on the Web Sta-  
tus Monitor.  
*3  
An essential setting when [Network Boot] is set to " NONE ". Input nothing when [Net-  
work Boot] is set to " DHCP ".  
*4  
*5  
When you use no network printers, you don't have to configure this setting.  
Be sure to configure this setting on this machine first. You can change the setting on  
the Web Status Monitor after you configure the first time setting on the machine.  
Automatically configured when you register this machine on ScanRouter V2 Profes-  
sional/Lite. It is essential to register this machine on ScanRouter V2 Profession-  
al/Lite.  
*6  
*7  
Display using [Delivery] under [Delivery Settings] on the Web Status Monitor.  
Display using [Network Interface Board] under [Admin Info.] on the Web Status Monitor.  
A setting when you use a wireless LAN card.  
*8  
*9  
*10  
www.cnet.ie  
A setting when [Communication Mode] is set to " Infrastructure mode " or " 802.11 Ad  
hoc mode ".  
50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                   
Initial Scanner Setup  
*11  
A setting when [Communication Mode] is set to " Ad hoc mode " or " 802.11 Ad hoc  
mode ".  
*12  
*13  
*14  
*15  
*16  
*17  
*18  
*19  
*20  
*21  
*22  
*23  
*24  
*25  
An essential setting when [ WEP Setting ] is set to " Enable ".  
Available up to 10 registrations.  
The default value applied to the Community Name 1.  
The default value applied to the Community Name 2.  
The default value applied to the Community Name 3 through 8.  
Available up to 4 registrations, including " Default ".  
Display using [Status] main menu on the Web Status Monitor.  
Available up to 1000 registrations.  
Available up to 30 registrations.  
Available up to 2000 registrations.  
Display using [1.System Settings] on this machine.  
Display using [2.SendScan Settings] on this machine.  
Available up to 99 registrations.  
"Yes" is automatically selected for the first printer that is registered. "No" is selected  
for all other printers.  
3
www.cnet.ie  
51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                             
Configuring the Scanner Settings  
System Settings  
This section describes the setup items  
contained in the System Settings  
menu. They include an item used to  
select the initial screen of the ma-  
chine, and basic setup items for oper-  
ating this machine on a network, such  
as an IP address setting. This section  
also shows you how to configure  
these settings using the control panel  
of this machine.  
When you select this option, "  
Select Method " screen is initial-  
ly displayed. On this screen,  
pressing the {1} key displays  
the Delivery Server standby  
screen or the E-mail/Send File  
standby screen, depending on  
the settings in [7.Select Method].  
Pressing the {2} key displays  
the Print Scan initial screen for  
printing scan data.  
3
Note  
• Send Scan  
❒ See p.186 “Using Wireless LAN”  
for information about how to use  
an optional wireless LAN card.  
Information to Set in [System  
Settings]  
When you select this option, the  
Delivery Server standby screen  
or the E-mail/Send File standby  
screen is initially displayed. The  
screen initially displayed de-  
pends on the settings in [7.Select  
Method].  
Note  
❒ You can configure the settings that  
are mentioned in this section, us-  
ing the Web Status Monitor. How-  
ever, you must configure the IP  
address setting using the control  
panel of this machine first. And  
then, you can change the setting on  
the Web Status Monitor.  
• Print Scan  
When you select this option, the  
Print Scan standby screen is dis-  
played as the initial screen.  
❖ Function Priority  
This item lets you select the initial  
screen that is displayed when you  
turn the power on.  
❖ IP Address  
When a fixed IP address is as-  
signed to this machine on the net-  
work you use, enter the IP address  
to this item in the form of  
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx (xxx:0 through  
255).  
• Select: Send/Print  
Do not specify this item manually  
when you use this machine on a  
DHCP environment. An IP ad-  
dress is automatically assigned to  
this machine by selecting " DHCP "  
www.cnet.ie  
for [Network Boot].  
52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
System Settings  
• Access mask is the value to  
specify the restriction range. It  
is collated (logically multiplied)  
with access control to limit cli-  
ents that can use this product as  
a network TWAIN scanner.  
Specify both the access control and  
the access mask in the form of  
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx (xxx:0 through  
255).  
❖ Subnet Mask  
When a fixed IP address is as-  
signed to this machine on the net-  
work you use, enter the subnet  
mask to this item in the form of  
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx (xxx:0 through  
255).  
Do not specify this item manually  
when you use this machine on a  
DHCP environment, because this  
item is automatically assigned to  
this machine by selecting " DHCP "  
for [Network Boot].  
Note  
3
❒ When you want to set no limita-  
tion of access to this machine,  
leave these settings as their de-  
fault values.  
❖ Default Gateway Address  
When a fixed IP address is as-  
signed to this machine on the net-  
work you use, enter the default  
gateway address to this item in the  
form of xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx (xxx:0  
through 255).  
Do not specify this item manually  
when you use this machine on a  
DHCP environment, because this  
item is automatically assigned to  
this machine by selecting " DHCP "  
for [Network Boot].  
❒ When an IP address of a client  
computer falls within the logi-  
cal products of the access con-  
trol entry and the access mask  
entry, the client computer is  
granted its access to this ma-  
chine.  
❒ For example, a client computer  
that has an IP address within  
the range shown under “Ac-  
cess-enabled IP address” col-  
umn in the following table has  
right to access this machine, in  
accordance with the entry of the  
access mask to the left, when  
you set the access control to  
192.168.15.18. In the following  
table, “xxx” means any value is  
available.  
❖ Access Control and Access Mask  
Use these setup items together to  
determine which of client comput-  
ers has right to access this machine  
when it works as a network  
TWAIN scanner.  
Each of the client computers is  
granted or denied its access to this  
machine by its IP address, which is  
determined by an access control  
entry and an access mask entry in  
combination. An access control en-  
try is used as a reference value of  
the IP address, while an access  
mask entry determines the range  
of the IP addresses.  
Access mask en- Access-enabled  
try  
IP address  
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx  
192.168.xxx.xxx  
000.000.000.000  
255.255.000.000  
255.255.240.000  
192.168.0.xxx  
∼192.168.15.xxx  
255.255.255.000  
255.255.255.240  
192.168.15.xxx  
• Access control is the value that  
becomes the reference for re-  
stricting the client that uses this  
product as a network TWAIN  
192.168.15.16  
∼192.168.15.31  
255.255.255.255  
192.168.15.18  
www.cnet.ie  
scanner  
53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring the Scanner Settings  
❖ Network Boot  
❖ DNS Server 3 IP Address  
Use this item to select whether you  
use this machine on a DHCP envi-  
ronment or not. Set this item to “  
NONE ” when a fixed IP address is  
assigned to this machine on the  
network you use. Set this item to “  
DHCP ” when you use this ma-  
chine on a DHCP environment.  
When a third DNS server runs on  
the network you use this machine,  
specify the IP address of the third  
DNS server in the form of  
xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx (xxx:0 through  
255).  
Note  
❒ This setting can only be config-  
ured using the Web Status Mon-  
itor.  
Note  
❒ If you plan to use delivery serv-  
er function, assign an IP address  
of this machine statistically,  
even when you use this ma-  
chine on a DHCP environment.  
You still have to select “ DHCP  
” for [Network Boot], and do not  
enter any value to the following  
setup items: [IP Address], [Subnet  
Mask], [Default Gateway Address].  
3
❖ Delivery Server IP Address  
This item is automatically config-  
ured when you register this ma-  
chine to a delivery server operated  
by ScanRouter V2 Profession-  
al/Lite. Do not specify this item  
manually.  
❖ Transmission Speed  
❒ After you have changed the set-  
ting of this item, turn off the  
power and then back on to acti-  
vate the change.  
Use this item to select a network  
transmission speed from “Auto”,  
“100Mbps” or “10Mbps” when  
you connect this machine to a net-  
work using a cable.  
❖ DNS Server 1 IP Address  
Specify the IP address of the pri-  
mary DNS server on the network  
you use this machine, in the form  
of xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx (xxx:0 through  
255).  
❖ LAN Type  
Use this item to select the type of  
LAN from the following options.  
• Ethernet  
Select this option when you  
connect this machine to a net-  
work using a cable.  
Note  
❒ This setting can only be config-  
ured using the Web Status Mon-  
itor.  
• IEEE 802.11b  
Select this option when you  
connect this machine to a net-  
work using an optional wireless  
LAN card.  
❖ DNS Server 2 IP Address  
When a secondary DNS server  
runs on the network you use this  
machine, specify the IP address of  
the secondary DNS server in the  
form of xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx (xxx:0  
through 255).  
Note  
❒ After you have changed the set-  
ting of this item, turn off the  
power and then back on to acti-  
vate the change.  
Note  
❒ This setting can only be config-  
ured using the Web Status Mon-  
www.cnet.ie  
itor.  
54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
System Settings  
D Select the option you want among  
" Select: Send/Print ", " Send Scan  
" and " Print Scan ".  
Configuring [System Settings]  
Reference  
See p.15 “Using Keys Displayed on  
the Screen” for information about  
how to select items displayed on  
the screen.  
• The option that is currently se-  
lected is displayed first.  
A Press the {User Tools} key.  
• "*" mark appears along with the  
3
option currently selected  
• Use [↑] and [↓] to display the  
option you want to select.  
ABK006S  
E While the option you want to se-  
lect is displayed, press [OK].  
The Scanner Features menu is dis-  
played.  
This saves the setting you have  
configured, and returns to the Sys-  
tem Settings menu.  
B Press the {1} key.  
Note  
❒ Pressing [Cancel] discards the  
selected option, and returns to  
the previous screen.  
The System Settings menu is dis-  
played, and "1. Function Priority "  
appears as the setup item currently  
selected.  
F Configure the necessary settings  
in accordance with your network  
environment.  
C Press [OK].  
To configure network boot and  
related settings when a fixed IP  
address is assigned to this  
machine  
The setting screen for "1. Function  
Priority " appears.  
Note  
❒ Pressing [PrevMenu] returns to  
A Press [Next].  
the parent menu screen.  
“2. IP Address ” appears as the  
setup item currently selected.  
B Press [OK].  
The setting screen for “2. IP Ad-  
dress ” appears.  
www.cnet.ie  
55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Configuring the Scanner Settings  
C Specify the IP address of this  
F Specify each value for “3. Sub-  
net Mask ”, “4. Default Gate-  
way Address ”, “5. Access  
Control ” and “6. Access Mask  
” in the same way that you  
have done in steps B through  
E.  
machine.  
• Input the IP address using  
“7. Network Boot ” appears as  
the setup item currently select-  
ed.  
the number keys.  
• An IP address consists of  
four parts, and each part has  
a number within the range of  
0 to 255. Make sure that you  
input each part of the IP ad-  
dress in three digits. For ex-  
ample, when you want to  
specify “8” for a part, high-  
light the part and then input  
“008” using the number  
keys.  
Note  
3
❒ When you want to set no lim-  
itation of access to this ma-  
chine, it is not necessary to  
specify “5. Access Control ”,  
while you need to confirm  
that “6. Access Mask ” is set  
to “000.000.000.000”.  
G Press [OK].  
You can use {11} (or {#} )  
and {0} keys to move the  
highlighting to right and left.  
Note  
❒ You can use the {Clear/Stop}  
key to clear the three-digit  
number currently highlight-  
ed.  
The setting screen for “7. Net-  
work Boot ” appears.  
H Use [↑] and [↓] to display “  
NONE ”.  
D When you are finished, press  
[OK].  
This returns to the System Set-  
tings menu.  
Note  
Note  
❒ Pressing [Cancel] discards the  
value that you have speci-  
fied, and returns to the previ-  
ous screen.  
❒ “*” mark appears along with  
the option currently selected.  
I While “NONE” is displayed,  
press [OK].  
E Press [Next]  
This returns to the System Set-  
tings menu.  
“3. Subnet Mask ” appears as  
the setup item currently select-  
ed.  
Note  
❒ Pressing [Cancel] leaves the  
setting as it was (the option  
marked with “*” remains ac-  
tive), and returns to the pre-  
vious screen.  
www.cnet.ie  
56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
System Settings  
D Use [↑] and [↓] to display “  
DHCP ”.  
To configure network boot  
settings when you use this  
machine on a DHCP environment  
A Press [Next] three times.  
“5. Access Control ” appears as  
the setup item currently select-  
ed.  
Note  
❒ “*” mark appears along with  
the option currently selected.  
Note  
E While “ DHCP ” is displayed,  
press [OK].  
❒ It is not necessary to specify  
“2. IP Address ”, “3. Subnet  
Mask ” and “4. Default Gate-  
way Address ”. The DHCP  
server on your network as-  
signs these values automati-  
cally.  
3
This returns to the System Set-  
tings menu.  
Note  
❒ Pressing [Cancel] leaves the  
setting as it was (the option  
marked with “*” remains ac-  
tive), and returns to the pre-  
vious screen.  
B Specify each value for “5. Ac-  
cess Control ” and “6. Network  
Boot ”.  
You can specify these values in  
the same way that you have  
done in steps B through E un-  
der p.55 “To configure network  
boot and related settings when  
a fixed IP address is assigned to  
this machine”. When you are  
finished, “7. Network Boot ” ap-  
pears as the setup item current-  
ly selected.  
G Press [Next].  
“8. Delivery Server IP Address ”  
appears as the setup item currently  
selected.  
Note  
Note  
❒ This item is automatically con-  
figured when you register this  
machine to a delivery server op-  
erated by ScanRouter V2 Profes-  
sional/Lite. Press [OK] to  
confirm this setting after you  
have registered this machine to  
a delivery server, and then  
press [Cancel] to return to the  
System Settings menu.  
❒ When you want to set no lim-  
itation of access to this ma-  
chine, it is not necessary to  
specify “5. Access Control ”,  
while you need to confirm  
that “6. Access Mask ” is set  
to “000.000.000.000”.  
C Press [OK].  
The setting screen for “7. Net-  
work Boot ” appears.  
www.cnet.ie  
57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring the Scanner Settings  
H Press [Next].  
J
Press [Next].  
“12. Wireless LAN Signal ” ap-  
pears as the setup item currently  
selected.  
Note  
“9. MAC Address ” appears as the  
setup item currently selected.  
❒ When an optional wireless LAN  
card is in use under infrastruc-  
ture mode, you can check cur-  
rent condition of wireless LAN  
signal by pressing [OK]. When  
you are finished, press [Cancel]  
to return to the System Settings  
menu.  
Note  
❒ MAC address is a hardware ad-  
dress that uniquely identifies  
each machine, and cannot be  
changed. Press [OK] to see the  
MAC address of this machine,  
and then press [Cancel] to return  
to the System Settings menu.  
3
K
L
Press [ PrevMenu]  
I By pressing [Next] to display “10.  
Transmission Speed ” and “11.  
LAN Type ” as the setup item, se-  
lect options for each of them in  
the same way that you have done  
for setting “7. Network Boot ”.  
This returns to the Scanner Fea-  
tures menu.  
Press [ Exit ].  
Important  
This exits the Scanner Features  
menu, and returns to the standby  
screen that is displayed when you  
turn the power on.  
❒
Do not change the setting of “11.  
LAN Type ” from “ Ethernet ” to  
“ IEEE 802.11b ” using the con-  
trol panel of this machine. If you  
want to change to “IEEE802.11b”  
to use a wireless LAN card, you  
need to configure related set-  
tings by using the Web Status  
Monitor. See p.186 “Using Wire-  
less LAN” for details.  
Important  
❒ Never turn off the power of this  
machine before the standby  
screen is displayed. Doing so  
can discard all the settings you  
have configured, and return this  
machine to its factory default  
status.  
Note  
❒ Instead of pressing [Exit], you  
can press a number key to enter  
another setting menu.  
M
If you have changed the settings  
of “7. Network Boot ” and/or “11.  
LAN Type ”, turn off the power  
and then back on.  
The changes to the above settings  
are activated.  
www.cnet.ie  
58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Scanner Settings  
Scanner Settings  
This section describes the setup items  
contained in the Scanner Settings, and  
shows you how to configure the set-  
tings in the Send Scan Settings menu  
(which includes main setup items in  
the Scanner Settings) using the con-  
trol panel of this machine.  
Note  
❒ When you set “7. Select Method  
” to “ TWAIN ”, this setup item  
is dimmed and cannot be con-  
figured.  
❖ TWAIN Standby Time  
This item lets you specify the time  
after which this machine stands by  
for a network TWAIN command  
(or a [Enter Custom Send File] com-  
mand), from the last operation of  
the control panel of this machine.  
When you set this item to “Off”,  
this machine always stands by for  
these commands. When you set  
this item to “ On ”, you can set the  
time within the range of 3 to 30 sec-  
onds in 1-second increments.  
3
Information to Set in [System  
Settings]  
❖ 1. Select Method  
This item lets you select which of  
the functions of this machine has  
priority, when you use this ma-  
chine. You can select from the fol-  
lowing two options.  
• TWAIN  
With this option, the Network  
TWAIN standby screen is dis-  
played as the Send Scan initial  
screen. This means that the ma-  
chine stands by for receiving a  
scanning command from a cli-  
ent computer. While the Net-  
work TWAIN standby screen is  
displayed, press [Exit] to use the  
Delivery Server function or the  
Send Mail/Send File function  
(except for performing a Cus-  
tom File Send operation).  
Note  
❒
When this machine receives a net-  
work TWAIN command (or a [En-  
ter Custom Send File] command)  
before the specified TWAIN  
standby time goes by, the mes-  
sage “ Unable to make config-  
urations because Scanner is  
currently in use. Please try  
again later. ” appears on the  
client computer.  
❖ Auto Reset Timer  
This item lets you select whether to  
return to the state immediately af-  
ter power-on when this machine is  
not used for the specified time pe-  
riod. When you set this item to “  
Off ”, the screen currently dis-  
played remains until another oper-  
ation is performed or the power is  
turned off. When you set this item  
to “ On ”, you can set the time  
within the range of 10 to 999 sec-  
onds in 1-second increments.  
• Send File  
With this option, the Delivery  
Server standby screen or the E-  
mail/Send File standby screen  
is displayed as the Send Scan in-  
itial screen. While either of these  
screens is displayed, you can  
use this machine as a network  
TWAIN scanner or perform a  
Custom File Send operation  
from a client computer, when-  
ever no operation is performed  
www.cnet.ie  
on this machine.  
59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Configuring the Scanner Settings  
❖
Date/Time(Year/Month/Day/Hr/Min/Sec)  
This item lets you adjust the ma-  
chine’s date and time.  
The current date and time affects  
all the related operations of this  
machine, such as a time stamp in-  
serted in each of e-mail messages  
sent from this machine.  
❖ Compression(GrayScale/FullColour)  
This item determines whether to  
compress scan data, created under  
the following conditions.  
• Scan is performed for sending  
the scan data using Delivery  
Server function or Send  
Mail/Send File function.  
• Scan is performed with one of  
the following options is selected  
for [Scan Settings] → [Scan Type]  
: " Black and White:Gray Scale "  
or " Colour:Full Colour ".  
You can select from the following  
four options. JPEG compression is  
performed when you select any of  
the compression options.  
❖ Compression (Black and White)  
This item determines whether to  
compress scan data, created under  
the following conditions.  
3
• Scan is performed for sending  
the scan data using Delivery  
Server function or Send  
Mail/Send File function.  
• Scan is performed with one of  
the following options is selected  
for [Scan Settings] → [Scan Type]  
: " Black and White:Text ", "  
Black and White:Text/Photo ",  
or " Black and White:Photo ".  
• Normal Compression  
Intermediate compression is  
performed with the scan data,  
and intermediate file size and  
image quality can be obtained.  
• High Compression  
Note  
Higher compression is per-  
formed with the scan data so  
that the file size becomes much  
smaller, while the image quality  
gets relatively lower (in com-  
parison with normal compres-  
sion).  
❒ Compressing data increases the  
number of original pages that  
can be processed at a time. The  
number of original pages  
changes depending on the sta-  
tus of the originals.  
• Low Compression  
❒ When not compressing scanned  
data, file size is determined by  
the scanning size and resolu-  
tion, regardless of the status of  
the original. See p.200 “When  
[Black and White: Text], [Black  
and White: Text/Photo] or  
[Black and White: Photo] is se-  
lected”.  
Lower compression is per-  
formed with the scan data so  
that the image quality becomes  
relatively higher, while the file  
size gets larger (in comparison  
with normal compression).  
• Off  
Scanned data is not com-  
pressed. Quality is not lost, but  
file size and memory usage in-  
crease. File size is determined  
by the scanning size and resolu-  
tion, regardless of the status of  
the original.  
www.cnet.ie  
60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Scanner Settings  
• When “ Send File/TWAIN ” is  
selected under [7.Select Method]  
Select whether to update the  
contents of the destination lists  
of e-mail addresses, file send  
paths, and FTP servers auto-  
matically with the latest data  
registered using the Web Status  
Monitor’s [E-mail Address], [File  
Send Path] and [FTP Server].  
When “ On ” is selected, the des-  
tination list is updated each  
time you press [Dest.] or [Sender]  
on this machine. When “ Off ” is  
selected, the destination list is  
updated only when the power  
is turned on.  
Note  
❒ The size of compressed data  
varies among originals even if  
the same quality setting is made  
for them. The number of origi-  
nal pages that can be processed  
at a time also varies.  
❖ 7. Select Method  
You can select a method that suits  
for a combination of the functions  
you want to use when you perform  
a Send Scan operation. The follow-  
ing three options are available.  
3
• Delivery Server/TWAIN  
Select this option if you want to  
use Delivery Server and net-  
work TWAIN.  
Note  
❒ You can select “ Off ” if you do  
not plan to update the Address  
Book or the destination lists fre-  
quently. Selecting “ Off ” makes  
this machine react quickly when  
you press [Dest.] or [Sender].  
• Send File/TWAIN  
Select this option if you want to  
use e-mail, Send File (SMB),  
Send File (FTP), and network  
TWAIN.  
• TWAIN  
Select this option if you want to  
use Network TWAIN only.  
❖ Unit of Measure  
This item lets you select a unit of  
measurement that is used when  
you specify values for [Custom Size]  
of [Original Size] setting. You can se-  
lect between "mm" and "inch".  
❖ Auto Update Destination List  
•
When “ Delivery Server/TWAIN  
” is selected under [7.Select Meth-  
od]  
Select whether to update the con-  
tents of the Address Book auto-  
matically with the latest data  
from the delivery server. When “  
On ” is selected, the Address  
Book is updated each time you  
press [Dest.] or [Sender] on this  
machine. When “ Off ” is select-  
ed, the Address Book is updated  
only when the power is turned  
on.  
❖ sRGB  
This item lets you select whether to  
scan originals with the sRGB Col-  
our matching function enabled.  
This function is available only  
when you select “ Colour:Full Col-  
our ” in [Scan Type] under [Scan Set-  
tings].  
• When “ Off ” is selected, the  
sRGB Colour matching function  
is disabled.  
• When “ sRGB 1” is selected, the  
original's Colour tone is accu-  
rately reproduced, but the pa-  
per's yellowish tone may be  
www.cnet.ie  
reproduced also.  
61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Configuring the Scanner Settings  
• Selecting “ sRGB 2” reduces  
• Pressing [New Job] finishes  
the current scanning job and  
sends the scanned data. You  
can start a new job with the  
current settings after the  
scanned data is sent.  
the paper's yellowish tone.  
Note  
❒ Selecting “ sRGB 1” or “ sRGB  
2” disables the [Image Density]  
setting. (⇒ p.72)  
• Pressing [OK] finishes the  
current scanning job, sends  
the scanned data, and then  
returns to the initial screen  
when the power is turned on.  
When scanning is performed  
from the exposure glass  
The following screen appears  
when you press [Finish] after  
scanning the original on the ex-  
posure glass.  
❖ End of Scan Option  
This item lets you select how this  
machine behaves after a scanning  
operation ends. The option select-  
ed for this item applies scanning  
performed in a Send Scan (Deliv-  
ery Server or Send Mail/Send File)  
operation.  
3
Note  
❒ You can perform additional  
scan operation after a scanning  
from the exposure glass is fin-  
ished, regardless of the setting  
of this item.  
• Pressing [New Job] finishes  
the current scanning job and  
sends the scanned data. You  
can start a new job with the  
current settings after the  
scanned data is sent.  
❒ When you perform a Print Scan  
operation, the option selected  
for this setup item does not ap-  
ply.  
• Show Options after Each Scan  
Job  
• Pressing [OK] finishes the  
current scanning job, sends  
the scanned data, and then  
returns to the initial screen  
when the power is turned on.  
The screen for selecting the next  
operation appears on the dis-  
play panel of this machine.  
When scanning is performed  
from the ADF  
The following screen appears  
when all the originals in the  
ADF are scanned.  
Note  
❒ You can specify the time dur-  
ing which the screen for se-  
lecting the next operation  
remains displayed using  
[Configuration] → [Basic Set-  
tings] → [Scanner] → [Wait  
Time for Additional Scanning]  
on the Web Status Monitor.  
See the Web Status Monitor  
Help.  
• Press [Add] to continue scan-  
ning to add scanned data to  
the current image file.  
www.cnet.ie  
62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Scanner Settings  
❒ When you perform an [Enter  
Custom Send File] operation  
from the Web Status Moni-  
tor, selecting [New Job] and  
[OK] on the selection screen  
both finishes the current  
scanning job, sends the  
scanned data, and the [Enter  
Custom Send File] settings are  
retained. Press [PrevMenu] to  
return to the initial screen  
when the power is turned on.  
❖ Erase Border  
When you perform a scan opera-  
tion, it may happen that a border-  
line is reproduced on scan data by  
the shadow of paper ends of the  
original. This machine can erase  
the borderline using a white line,  
which width you can specify using  
[Erase Border]. You can select a line  
width from 1mm (0.04”) to 5mm  
(0.2”). Select "0mm" if you do not  
want to have the borderline  
erased. The option selected for this  
item applies scanning performed  
in a Send Scan (Delivery Server or  
Send Mail/Send File) operation.  
3
• Clear Settings after Each Scan  
Job  
❖ Select Language  
This item lets you select a language  
for displaying messages on the  
screen.  
The initial screen displayed im-  
mediately after power-on ap-  
pears on the display panel of  
this machine, and files are sent.  
❖ ADF Thin Paper  
This item lets you select how the  
ADF works.  
Note  
❒ When you perform an [Enter  
Custom Send File] operation  
from the Web Status Moni-  
tor, the [Enter Custom Send  
File] settings are retained af-  
ter files are sent. Press [Prev-  
Menu] to return to the initial  
screen when the power is  
turned on.  
• On  
Select this option when you  
scan originals that are 52g/m2  
(45kg) or thinner, or A5 size or  
smaller, using the ADF. With  
this option, feeding becomes  
stable even when you place  
such originals as mentioned  
above in the ADF. However,  
feeding becomes rather slower.  
• Off  
Select this option when you  
scan the originals other than  
those of mentioned in the "On"  
option. The ADF works at its  
highest speed when you select  
this option.  
Reference  
See the notes under p.109 “Sizes  
and Weights of recommended  
Originals”.  
www.cnet.ie  
63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring the Scanner Settings  
❖ Job Delivery Data Max. Setting  
This item lets you select whether to  
limit the maximum file size of a  
document to be sent by using the  
delivery server. When you set lim-  
itation of the size, you can specify  
it within the range of 1 MB to 64  
MB, in 1MB increments.  
❖ Time Zone  
This item lets you specify your lo-  
cal time zone, by selecting the time  
offset from GMT (Greenwich  
Mean Time).  
Note  
❒ This setting can only be config-  
ured using the Web Status Mon-  
itor.  
Note  
❒ You can also configure this set-  
ting by selecting [Configuration]  
→ [Delivery Settings] → [Delivery]  
on the Web Status Monitor.  
3
Configuring [Send Scan  
Settings]  
❖ Wait Time for Additional Scanning  
When “Show options after each  
scan job” is selected for [End of Scan  
Option], enter the time during  
which the setting menu appears.  
Specify the time in seconds within  
the range of 3 through 900. When  
the specified time elapses, the ini-  
tial screen displayed immediately  
after power-on appears on the con-  
trol panel and files are sent.  
Follow the steps below to configure  
Send Scan Settings using the control  
panel of this machine.  
Note  
❒ You can also configure these set-  
tings using the Web Status Moni-  
tor.  
Reference  
See p.15 “Using Keys Displayed on  
the Screen” for information about  
how to select items displayed on  
the screen.  
Note  
❒ This setting can only be config-  
ured using the Web Status Mon-  
itor.  
A Press the {User Tools}  
❖ Select Title  
This item lets you select the titles  
that are displayed when you press  
the {./*} (Title) key. You can select  
between " Alphabet " and " Custom  
Title ".  
ABK006S  
The Scanner Features menu is dis-  
played.  
Note  
❒ This setting can only be config-  
ured using the Web Status Mon-  
itor.  
B Press the {2} key.  
❒ Before using " Custom Title ", it  
is necessary to register custom  
titles using the Web Status Mon-  
itor, and restart this machine.  
The Send Scan Settings menu is  
displayed, and “1. Select Method ”  
appears as the setup item currently  
www.cnet.ie  
selected.  
64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Scanner Settings  
C Press [OK]  
H Select the option you want for “2.  
TWAIN Standby Time ”.  
If you select “ On ”, specify the  
time after which this machine  
stands by for a network TWAIN  
command (or a [Enter Custom Send  
File] command) using the number  
keys.  
The setting screen for “1. Select  
Method ” appears.  
D Select the function that you main-  
ly use from “ Send File ” or “  
TWAIN ”.  
3
• Use the {1} and {0} keys to  
highlight the setting you want.  
Note  
• The option that is currently se-  
❒ To correct the number, press the  
{Clear/Stop} key to clear the  
number you have entered.  
lected is displayed first.  
• “*” mark appears along with the  
option currently selected.  
I Press [ OK ]  
• Use [↑] and [↓] to display the  
option you want to select.  
This saves the setting you have  
configured, and returns to the  
Send Scan Settings menu.  
E Press [OK].  
This saves the setting you have  
made, and returns to the Send Scan  
Settings menu.  
Note  
❒ Pressing [Cancel] discards the  
selected option, and returns to  
the previous screen.  
Note  
❒ Pressing [Cancel] discards the  
selected option, and returns to  
the previous screen.  
J Press [Next].  
“3. Auto Reset Timer ” appears as  
the setup item currently selected.  
F Press [Next].  
Note  
“2. TWAIN Standby Time ” ap-  
pears as the setup item currently  
selected.  
❒ Pressing [Prev.] displays the  
previous setup item.  
K Set the auto reset timer in the  
G Press [OK].  
same way that you have done in  
the steps through .  
G
J
“4.  
Date/Time(Year/Month/Day/Hr  
/Min/Sec) ” appears as the setup  
item currently selected.  
The setting screen for “2. TWAIN  
Standby Time ” appears.  
www.cnet.ie  
65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Configuring the Scanner Settings  
L Press [OK].  
P Select the option you want for  
“15. Job Delivery Data Max. Set-  
ting ” in the same way that you  
have done in the steps through  
G
.
I
The setting screen for “4.  
Date/Time(Year/Month/Day/Hr  
/Min/Sec) ” appears.  
Q Press [PrevMenu].  
M Use the {1} and {0} keys and  
the number keys to adjust the cur-  
rent date and time.  
3
This returns to the Scanner Fea-  
tures menu.  
R Press [Exit].  
Note  
❒ The internal clock starts work-  
ing from the adjusted time  
when you press [OK].  
This exits the Scanner Features  
menu, and returns to the standby  
screen that is displayed when you  
turn the power on.  
❒ To correct the number that is  
currently highlighted, press the  
{Clear/Stop} key to clear the  
number you have entered, and  
then input the correct number.  
Important  
❒ Never turn off the power of this  
machine before the standby  
screen is displayed. Doing so  
can discard all the settings you  
have configured, and return this  
machine to its factory default  
status.  
N Press [OK].  
This returns to the Send Scan Set-  
tings menu.  
Note  
❒ Pressing [Cancel] discards the  
adjusted time value, and re-  
turns to the previous screen.  
Note  
❒ Instead of pressing [Exit], you  
can press a number key to enter  
another setting menu.  
O By pressing [Next] to display “5.  
Compression (Black and White) ”  
through “14. ADF Thin Paper ” as  
the setup item, select options for  
each of them in the same way that  
you have done in the steps  
C
through .  
E
After all, “15. Job Delivery Data  
Max. Setting ” appears as the setup  
item currently selected.  
www.cnet.ie  
66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Print Scan Settings  
Print Scan Settings  
This section describes all the setup  
items included in Print Scan Settings  
menu, and shows you how to config-  
ure these settings using the control  
panel of this machine.  
Note  
❒ Scan is performed with black  
and white or in gray scale, de-  
pending on the setting you have  
configured in the Print Settings  
menu. If you select " Text " as  
[Scan Type] in the Print Settings  
menu, scan is performed with  
black and white. If you select "  
Text/Photo " or " Photo ", scan is  
performed with gray scale.  
Information to Set in [Print  
Scan Settings]  
3
❖ Max. Number of Copies  
This item lets you set an upper lim-  
it for the number of copies that you  
can specify when you perform a  
Print Scan operation, within the  
range of 1 to 999.  
Configuring [Print Scan  
Settings]  
Follow the steps below to configure  
Print Scan Settings using the control  
panel of this machine.  
Note  
❒ You can also configure this set-  
ting by selecting [Configuration]  
→ [Print Scan Settings] → [Print  
Scan] on the Web Status Moni-  
tor.  
Note  
❒ You can also configure these set-  
tings using the Web Status Moni-  
tor.  
❖ Colour/Black and White  
Reference  
This item lets you select default  
scan setting for Print Scan, be-  
tween " Colour " and " Black and  
White ".  
See p.15 “Using Keys Displayed on  
the Screen” for information about  
how to select items displayed on  
the screen.  
• Colour  
The original is scanned with full  
colour. With this option, you  
will have copies in colour when  
you use a colour printer, or cop-  
ies in black and white when you  
use a monochrome printer.  
A Press the {User Tools} key.  
• Black and White  
ABK006S  
The original is scanned with  
black and white or with gray  
scale.  
The Scanner Features menu is dis-  
played.  
www.cnet.ie  
67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Configuring the Scanner Settings  
B Press the {3} key.  
F Press [Next].  
"2. Colour/Black and White " ap-  
pears as the setup item currently  
selected.  
G Press [OK].  
The Print Scan Settings menu is  
displayed, and "1. Max. Number of  
Copies " appears as the setup item  
currently selected.  
C Press [OK].  
3
The setting screen for "2. Col-  
our/Black and White " appears.  
H Select "Color" or " Colour/Black  
and White ".  
The setting screen for "1. Max.  
Number of Copies " appears.  
Note  
❒ Pressing [PrevMenu] returns to  
the parent menu screen.  
• The option that is currently se-  
lected is displayed first.  
• "*" mark appears along with the  
D Input maximum number of cop-  
ies you want to set using the  
number keys.  
option currently selected.  
• Use [↑] and [↓] to display the  
option you want to select.  
I While the option you want to se-  
lect is displayed, press [OK].  
Note  
❒ To correct the number, press  
{Clear/Stop} key to clear the  
number you have entered.  
This saves the setting you have  
configured, and returns to the  
Print Scan Settings menu.  
E Press [OK].  
This saves the setting you have  
made, and returns to the Print Scan  
Settings menu.  
Note  
❒ Pressing [Cancel] discards the  
selected option, and returns to  
the previous screen.  
Note  
❒ Pressing [Cancel] discards the  
entered value, and returns to  
the previous screen.  
www.cnet.ie  
68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Print Scan Settings  
J Press [PrevMenu].  
This returns to the Scanner Fea-  
tures menu.  
K Press [Exit].  
3
This exits the Scanner Features  
menu, and returns to the standby  
screen that is displayed when you  
turn the power on.  
Important  
❒ Never turn off the power of this  
machine before the standby  
screen is displayed. Doing so  
can discard all the settings you  
have configured, and return this  
machine to its factory default  
status.  
Note  
❒ Instead of pressing [Exit], you  
can press a number key to enter  
another setting menu.  
www.cnet.ie  
69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring the Scanner Settings  
Registering Scan Settings  
You can configure and register up to  
four sets of settings for scanning,  
when performing a Send Scan (e-  
mail, Send File (SMB/FTP) or Deliv-  
ery Server) operation.  
• Black and White:Gray Scale  
Scans originals containing  
mainly black-and-white photos,  
and colour photos as black-and-  
white photos.  
Selecting [ Gray Scale ] reduces  
the number of original pages  
that can be scanned at a time.  
Memory areas named “ Default ”, “  
User 1”, “ User 2”, and “ User 3” are  
available for registering Scan Set-  
tings. You can easily recall the set-  
tings you have registered to “ User 1”,  
“ User 2”, or “ User 3”, which means  
you don’t have to configure detailed  
settings each time you send scan data.  
Settings registered to “ Default ” ap-  
ply when you send scan data without  
selecting “ User 1”, “ User 2”, or “  
User 3”, or without manually config-  
uring Scan Settings.  
3
• Colour:Text  
Scans standard originals con-  
taining mainly text as colour  
images.  
• Colour:Text/Photo  
Scans originals containing  
graphs, photos, and text as col-  
our images.  
• Colour:Photo  
Scans originals containing  
mainly colour photos and  
graphs as colour images.  
Information to Register in  
[Send Scan Settings]  
• Colour:Full Colour  
Scans high-definition colour  
photos.  
❖ Scan Type  
This item lets you select a scan  
type. The number of colours and  
gradation levels are automatically  
selected according to the selected  
scan type.  
Note  
❒ Selecting [Colour:Full Colour]  
reduces the number of origi-  
nal pages that can be scanned  
at a time.  
• Black and White:Text  
❖ Resolution  
Scans standard originals con-  
taining mainly text as black-  
and-white binary images.  
This item lets you select the scan  
resolution. You can select from  
100dpi, 200dpi, 300dpi, 400dpi,  
600dpi and [Custom Resolution].  
• Black and White:Text/Photo  
Scans originals containing  
graphs, photos, and text as  
black-and-white binary images.  
Note  
❒ The higher the resolution, the  
smaller the number of original  
pages that can be scanned at a  
time.  
• Black and White:Photo  
Scans originals containing  
mainly black-and-white photos  
and graphs as black-and-white  
binary images.  
❒ When you select [Custom Resolu-  
tion], you can specify the resolu-  
tion within the range of 100dpi  
www.cnet.ie  
through 1200dpi in 1dpi incre-  
ments.  
70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Registering Scan Settings  
❖ Scan Size  
❖ Scanning Area  
This item lets you select the size of  
the area to be scanned. You can se-  
lect from the following options.  
Auto Detect, A3S, A4S, A4R,  
A5S, A5R, 11x17S, 81/2x14S,  
81 /2 x13S, 81 /2 x11RS,  
81 /2 x11S, 51 /2 x81 /2 R,  
51/2x81/2S, B4JIS (Japanese In-  
dustrial Standard)S, B5JISS,  
B5JISR, Custom Area Setting  
Specify the position where scan-  
ning ends when [Custom Area Set-  
ting] is selected in the [Scan Size]  
list.  
Enter the offset from the position  
specified for [Start Positn.], in mil-  
limeters or inches.  
Note  
❒ This setting is enabled only  
when [Custom Area Setting] is se-  
lected in the [Scan Size] list.  
3
Note  
❒ Original sizes that can be auto-  
detected vary depending on  
where you place the originals  
(on the exposure glass or on the  
ADF). See ⇒ p.110 “The Origi-  
nal Sizes Available for Auto De-  
tection” for details.  
❒ You can select millimeters or  
inches to specify the position  
using [Unit of Measure] in [2.Send-  
Scan Settings] under the Scanner  
Features menu. See p.61 “Unit  
of Measure” for details.  
❒ Make sure that you specify ver-  
tical/horizontal positions and  
scanning areas to be within the  
available scan area. The availa-  
ble scan area varies depending  
on where you place the origi-  
nals (on the exposure glass or  
on the ADF).  
❒ When [Custom Area Setting] is se-  
lected, specify the scanning area  
for [Start Positn.] and [Scanning  
Area].  
❖ Position  
Specify the position where scan-  
ning starts when [Custom Area Set-  
ting] is selected in the [Scan Size]  
list.  
Enter the offset from the reference  
(start) point in millimeters or inch-  
es.  
Note  
❒ This setting is enabled only  
when [Custom Area Setting] is se-  
lected in the [Scan Size] list.  
❒ You can select millimeters or  
inches to specify the position  
using [Unit of Measure] in [2.Send-  
Scan Settings] under the Scanner  
Features menu. See ⇒ p.61  
“Unit of Measure” for details.  
www.cnet.ie  
71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring the Scanner Settings  
The following illustrates the refer-  
ence point and actual scanning  
area in accordance with the place  
where you set the originals.  
• When [Scan Type] is set to “  
Black and White:Text ”, “ Black  
and White:Text/Photo ” or “  
Black and White:Photo ” and  
[Original Settings] is set to a 1-sid-  
ed option:  
A When the document is set in  
document glass  
297mm (11.7”) (vertical) and  
2000mm (78.7”) (horizontal)  
from the reference point  
• When [Scan Type] is set to other  
than the above, and [Original Set-  
tings] is set to a 1-sided option:  
297mm (11.7”) (vertical) and  
630mm (24.8”) (horizontal)  
from the reference point  
3
ADG012S  
• When [Original Settings] is set to  
a 2-sided option:  
When you place the originals on  
the exposure glass, the available  
area for scanning is 300mm  
(11.8”) (vertical) and 432mm  
(17”) (horizontal) from the ref-  
erence point, regardless of the  
setting in [Scan Type]. Be sure to  
specify [Position] and [Scanning  
Area] to be within the available  
area for scanning.  
297mm (11.7”) (vertical) and  
432mm (17”) (horizontal) from  
the reference point  
Be sure to specify [Position] and  
[Scanning Area] to be within the  
available area for scanning.  
Note  
❒ The inside line of the original ta-  
ble’s guide on the side of the  
control panel exactly passes the  
vertical reference point for the  
ADF scanning, when the guide  
is fully expanded.  
B When you place the originals in  
the ADF  
❖ Image Density  
This item lets you select the scan  
density in one of the seven steps.  
The larger the value, the darker the  
scanned image becomes.  
ADG013S  
When you place the originals in  
the ADF, the available area for  
scanning is as follows depending  
on the setting in [Scan Type] and  
[Original Settings].  
www.cnet.ie  
72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Registering Scan Settings  
❖ Erase Colour  
❖ Filter  
This setting is available only when  
“ Black and White:Text ”, “ Black  
and White:Text/Photo ”, “ Black  
and White:Photo ”, or “ Black and  
White:Gray Scale ” is selected in  
the [ Scan Type ] list. You can select  
an erase colour from red, green, or  
blue, which colour is deleted (ig-  
nored) when scanning is per-  
formed. Select “ Off ” when you  
want to disable erase colour.  
This item lets you select whether to  
use a filter for scanning.  
• Off  
No filter for scanning.  
• MTF  
Images are scanned with sharp-  
ened borders.  
• Fine Noise  
Images are scanned with sof-  
tened borders.  
3
Note  
❖ Inversion  
This item lets you select whether to  
scan an original with white and  
black portions inverted, when “  
Black and White:Text ”, “ Black  
and White:Text/Photo ”, “ Black  
and White:Photo ”, or “ Black and  
White:Gray Scale ” is selected in  
the [Scan Type] list.  
❒ The erase colour function may  
not work as expected depend-  
ing on the colours on the origi-  
nals.  
❖ Noise Reduction  
This item lets you select the size of  
spots erased from the scanned im-  
age as unwanted noise. Spot size is  
indicated in dots. When [Off] is se-  
lected, all small spots are scanned.  
❖ File Type  
This item lets you select the format  
for saving scanned images. The op-  
tion you select for this setup item  
affects the send file operations, in-  
cluding sending a file as an e-mail  
attachment, sending a file to an  
Windows shared folder, and send-  
ing a file to an FTP server.  
Note  
❒ The numbers in each of the op-  
tions (“3x3”, “4x4”, and “5x5”)  
stand for the minimum range of  
detecting isolated dots on the  
original. All the isolated dots  
that are fully covered by the  
specified range are erased, in  
accordance with the option you  
select.  
Note  
❒ When a send file operation is  
performed using the delivery  
server function, the file type is  
determined in accordance with  
the delivery server setting.  
❖ Edge Smoothing  
This item lets you select whether to  
enable or disable edge smoothing,  
when “ Black and White:Text ”, “  
Black and White:Text/Photo ”, or “  
Black and White:Photo ” is select-  
ed in the [Scan Type] list.  
When “ On ” is selected for this  
item, text and graphics are scanned  
with their edges smoothed.  
• Single Page  
Each page is saved as a single,  
separate file. When an original  
of two or more pages is  
scanned, the same number of  
files as the number of original  
pages is created.  
www.cnet.ie  
73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuring the Scanner Settings  
Note  
Registering [Scan Settings]  
❒ When “ Black and White:  
Gray Scale ” or “ Colour:Full  
Colour ” is selected in the [  
Scan Type ] list, and “ High  
Compression ”, “ Normal  
Compression ”, or “ Low  
Compression ” is selected in  
the [Compression (Gray  
Scale/Full Colour)] list under  
[System Settings], the scanned  
image is saved as a JPEG file.  
Otherwise, it is saved as a  
TIFF file.  
Follow the steps below to configure  
and register Scan Settings using the  
control panel of this machine.  
Note  
❒ You can also configure these set-  
tings using the Web Status Moni-  
tor.  
3
Reference  
See p.15 “Using Keys Displayed on  
the Screen” for information about  
how to select items displayed on  
the screen.  
• PDF  
The scanned image is saved as a  
PDF file.  
A Press the {User Tools} key.  
• Multi-page TIFF  
An original of two or more pag-  
es is saved as one file.  
When “ Black and White:Gray  
Scale ” or “ Colour:Full Colour ”  
is selected in the [Scan Type ] list,  
and “ High Compression ”, “  
Normal Compression ”, or “  
Low Compression ” is selected  
in the [Compression (Gray  
Scale/Full Colour)] list under [Sys-  
tem Settings], the scanned image  
is saved as a PDF file. Other-  
wise, it is saved as a TIFF file.  
ABK006S  
The Scanner Features menu is dis-  
played.  
B Press the {4} key.  
❖ Original Settings  
The Scan Settings menu is dis-  
played.  
This item lets you select the orien-  
tation of the original, and whether  
to scan one side or both sides of the  
original. See p.112 “Original Ori-  
entation” for details.  
On this menu, you can select a  
memory area (“ Default ”, “ User  
1”, “ User 2”, or “ User 3”) for reg-  
istering the Scan Settings configu-  
ration.  
www.cnet.ie  
74  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Registering Scan Settings  
C Press the {1} key.  
G Press [Next ].  
“2. Resolution ” appears as the set-  
up item currently selected.  
Note  
❒
Pressing [Prev.] displays the pre-  
The Default Scan Settings menu is  
displayed, and “1. Scan Type ” ap-  
pears as the setup item currently  
selected.  
vious setup item.  
H Press [OK].  
D Press [OK].  
3
The setting screen for “2. Resolu-  
tion ” appears.  
The setting screen for “1. Scan  
Type ” appears.  
I Select the resolution you want.  
Note  
❒ Pressing [PrevMenu] returns to  
the parent menu screen.  
• The option that is currently se-  
E Select scan type.  
lected is displayed first.  
• “*” mark appears along with the  
option currently selected.  
• Use [↑] and [↓] to display the  
option you want to select.  
• The option that is currently se-  
lected is displayed first.  
To select a preset resolution  
• “*” mark appears along with the  
option currently selected.  
A While the preset resolution  
you want to select is displayed,  
press [OK].  
• Use [↑] and [↓] to display the  
option you want to select.  
This saves the setting you have  
selected, and returns to the De-  
fault Scan Settings menu.  
F While the option you want to se-  
lect is displayed, press [OK].  
This saves the setting you have se-  
lected, and returns to the Default  
Scan Settings menu.  
Note  
❒ Pressing [Cancel] discards the  
selected option, and returns  
to the Default Scan Settings  
menu.  
Note  
❒ Pressing [Cancel] discards the  
selected option, and returns to  
the Default Scan Settings menu.  
www.cnet.ie  
75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Configuring the Scanner Settings  
L Select the Scan size.  
To specify the resolution  
manually using [Custom  
Resolution]  
A While [Custom Resolution] is dis-  
played, press [Setting].  
• The option that is currently se-  
lected is displayed first.  
• “*” mark appears along with the  
option currently selected.  
• Use [↑] and [↓] to display the  
3
The setting screen for “ Custom  
Resolution ” appears.  
option you want to select.  
B Specify the resolution manual-  
To select a scan size from preset  
sizes  
ly by using the number keys.  
A While the preset scan size you  
want to select is displayed,  
press [OK].  
This saves the setting you have  
selected, and returns to the De-  
fault Scan Settings menu.  
Note  
❒ To correct the number, press  
the {Clear/Stop} key to clear  
the number you have en-  
tered.  
Note  
❒ Pressing [Cancel] discards the  
selected option, and returns  
to the Default Scan Settings  
menu.  
C Press [OK].  
This saves the setting you have  
entered, and returns to the De-  
fault Scan Settings menu.  
To set a custom area  
Note  
❒ Pressing [Cancel] discards the  
values you have entered, and  
returns to the Default Scan  
Settings menu.  
A While the option “ Custom  
Area Setting ” is displayed,  
press [Setting].  
J Press [Next].  
“3. Scan Size ” appears as the setup  
item currently selected.  
The setting screen for “ Custom  
Area Setting ” appears.  
K Press [OK].  
The setting screen for “3. Scan Size  
www.cnet.ie  
” appears.  
76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Registering Scan Settings  
B Use the {1} and {0} keys to  
highlight the item you want to  
input, and then use the  
number keys to input the val-  
ue.  
O Use the {1} and {0} keys to  
highlight the setting you want.  
P Press [OK].  
This saves the setting you have se-  
lected, and returns to the Default  
Scan Settings menu.  
Note  
3
❒ To correct the number you  
have entered, use the {1}  
and {0} keys to highlight it,  
and then press the {Clear  
/Stop} key to clear the  
number.  
Note  
❒ Pressing [Cancel] discards the  
selected setting, and returns to  
the Default Scan Settings menu.  
❒ You can also use the {#} key Q By pressing [Next] to display “5.  
as well as the {1} and {0}  
Erase Colour ” through “11. Orig-  
inal Settings ” as the setup item,  
select options for each of them in  
the same way that you have done  
keys to move selection.  
C Press [OK].  
This saves the setting you have  
entered, and returns to the De-  
fault Scan Settings menu.  
in steps through .  
D
G
R After all the settings are the way  
you want, press [PrevMenu].  
Note  
❒ Pressing [Cancel] discards the  
values you have entered, and  
returns to the Default Scan  
Settings menu.  
This registers the Scan Settings you  
have configured to the “ Default ”  
memory area, and returns to the  
Scan Settings menu.  
M Press [Next].  
“4. Image Density ” appears as the  
setup item currently selected.  
S While the Scan Settings menu is  
displayed, press {2}, {3} or {4}  
key to display a corresponding  
User Scan Settings menu.  
N Press [OK].  
The setting screen for “4. Image  
Density ” appears.  
For example, press the {2} key to  
display the User 1 Scan Settings  
menu.  
www.cnet.ie  
77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuring the Scanner Settings  
T Repeat steps through for each  
D
R
of “ User 1”, “ User 2”, and “ User  
3” memory areas.  
U When you are finished, press  
[PrevMenu].  
This returns to the Scanner Fea-  
tures menu.  
V Press [Exit].  
3
This exits the Scanner Features  
menu, and returns to the standby  
screen that is displayed when you  
turn the power on.  
Important  
❒ Never turn off the power of this  
machine before the standby  
screen is displayed. Doing so  
can discard all the settings you  
have configured, and return this  
machine to its factory default  
status.  
Note  
❒ Instead of pressing [Exit], you  
can press a number key to enter  
another setting menu.  
www.cnet.ie  
78  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Registering Print Settings  
Registering Print Settings  
You can configure and register up to  
four sets of settings for printing scan  
data. Memory areas named " Default  
", " User 1", " User 2", and " User 3" are  
available for registering Print Set-  
tings. You can easily recall the set-  
tings you have registered to " User 1",  
" User 2", or " User 3", which means  
you don't have to configure detailed  
settings each time you print scan da-  
ta. Settings registered to " Default "  
apply when you print scan data with-  
out selecting " User 1", " User 2", or "  
User 3", or without manually config-  
uring Print Settings.  
• Photo  
Select this option for originals  
containing photographs and/or  
other pictures. By selecting op-  
tion, scan is performed with  
gray scale.  
❖ Image Density  
Use this item to adjust density of  
the image for scanning. You can se-  
lect one of seven steps from 1  
(lightest) to 7 (darkest).  
3
❖ Original Size  
Use this item to select the size of  
the originals to be scanned. You  
can select from the following op-  
tions.  
Auto Detect, A3S, A4S, A4R,  
A5S, A5R, 11x17S, 81/2x14S,  
81/2x13S, 81/2x11R, 81/2x11S,  
51/2x81/2R, 51/2x81/2S, B4JISS,  
B5JISS, B5JISR, Custom size  
Information to Register in  
[Print Settings]  
❖ Scan Type  
This item lets you specify the type  
of originals (text or photo) for  
black and white or gray scale scan-  
ning.  
• The original sizes available for  
the [Auto Detect] function change  
depending on where you place  
the originals (on the exposure  
glass or on the ADF). See p.110  
“The Original Sizes Available  
for Auto Detection” for details.  
Note  
❒ The following options do not  
apply when you configure set-  
tings to perform scan with full  
colour.  
• When you select [Custom Size],  
you can specify the dimensions  
of the scan area (width and  
height).  
• Text  
Select this option for standard  
originals containing mainly  
text. With this option, scan is  
performed with black and white  
(halftoning is done by error dif-  
fusion).  
❖ Duplex  
Use this item to select a type of du-  
plex prints.  
•
(1 Sided Orig. → 1 Sided  
• Text/Photo  
Print)  
Select this option for originals  
containing a mixture of text and  
photographs. By selecting this  
option, scan is performed with  
gray scale.  
Scans a single-sided original  
and prints onto a single-sided  
page.  
www.cnet.ie  
79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Configuring the Scanner Settings  
•
•
•
(1 Sided Orig. → 2 Sided  
❖ Create Margin  
Use this item to reduce the image  
to 93% of the original size.  
Print)  
Scans two single-sided originals  
and prints onto a two-sided  
page.  
Note  
❒ This setup item is included un-  
der [Reduce/Enlarge] on the Web  
Status Monitor.  
(2 Sided Orig. → 1 Sided  
Print)  
Scans each side of a two-sided  
original and prints onto two  
separate pages.  
❒ When [Create Margin] is set to "  
On ", the image is reduced to  
93%, regardless of the settings  
in [Reduce/Enlarge].  
(2 Sided Orig. → 2 Sided  
Print)  
Scans a two-sided original and  
prints onto a two-sided page.  
3
❖ Quality/Speed  
Use this item to select scanning  
resolution.  
❖ Reduce/Enlarge  
• Quality  
This item lets you print scan data  
with the image reduced or en-  
larged using a preset ratio, or even  
changing the reproduction ratio in  
1% increments.  
Scanning is performed in 600  
dpi.  
• Speed  
Scanning is performed in 300  
dpi.  
• 25%  
• 50%: A3 → A5, B4 → B6  
• 61%: A3 → B5, A4 → B6  
• 82%: B4 → A4, B5 → A5  
• 87%: A3 → B4, A4 → B5  
• 100%:  
Note  
❒ This setup item does not affect  
printing resolution. The resolu-  
tion for printing is determined  
by the printer's maximum reso-  
lution.  
• 115%: B3 → A3, B5 →A4  
• 122%: A4 → B4, A5 → B5  
• 141%: A4 → A3, A5 → A4  
• 200%: A5 → A3, B6 → B4  
• 400%  
Registering [Print Settings]  
Follow the steps below to configure  
and register Print Settings using the  
control panel of this machine.  
• Custom Ratio: By selecting this  
option, you can change the re-  
production ratio in 1% incre-  
ments within the range of 25%  
to 400%.  
Note  
❒ You can also configure these set-  
tings using the Web Status Moni-  
tor.  
Reference  
Note  
See p.15 “Using Keys Displayed  
on the Screen” for information  
about how to select items dis-  
played on the screen.  
❒ This setup item appears as "  
Zoom " on the Web Status Mon-  
itor.  
www.cnet.ie  
80  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Registering Print Settings  
A Press the {User Tools} key.  
E Select the scan type.  
• The option that is currently se-  
ABK006S  
lected is displayed first.  
The Scanner Features menu is dis-  
played.  
• "*" mark appears along with the  
option currently selected.  
• Use [↑] and [↓] to display the  
B Press the {5} key.  
3
option you want to select.  
F While the option you want to se-  
lect is displayed, press [OK].  
This saves the setting you have se-  
lected, and returns to the Default  
Print Settings menu.  
The Print Settings menu is dis-  
played.  
On this menu, you can select a  
memory area (" Default ", " User 1",  
" User 2", or " User 3") for register-  
ing the Print Settings configura-  
tion.  
Note  
❒ Pressing [Cancel] discards the  
selected option, and returns to  
the Default Print Settings menu.  
G Press [Next].  
C Press the {1} key.  
"2. Image Density " appears as the  
setup item currently selected.  
Note  
❒ Pressing [Prev.] displays the  
previous setup item.  
The Default Print Settings menu is  
displayed, and "1. Scan Type " ap-  
pears as the setup item currently  
selected.  
H Press [OK].  
Note  
❒ Pressing [PrevMenu] returns to  
the parent menu screen.  
The setting screen for "2. Image  
Density " appears.  
D Press [OK].  
I Use the {1} and {0} keys to  
highlight the setting you want.  
The setting screen for "1. Scan Type  
" appears.  
www.cnet.ie  
81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Configuring the Scanner Settings  
Note  
J Press [OK].  
❒ Pressing [Cancel] discards the  
selected option, and returns  
to the Default Print Settings  
menu.  
This saves the setting you have se-  
lected, and returns to the Default  
Print Settings menu.  
Note  
❒ Pressing [Cancel] discards the  
selected setting, and returns to  
the Default Print Settings menu.  
To set a custom size  
A While the option " Custom Size  
" is displayed, press [Setting].  
K Press [Next].  
3
"3. Original Size " appears as the  
setup item currently selected.  
L Press [OK].  
The setting screen for " Custom  
Size " appears.  
B Use the {1} and {0} keys to  
highlight the item you want to  
input, and then use the  
number keys to input the val-  
ue.  
The setting screen for "3. Original  
Size " appears.  
M Select the original size.  
Note  
• The option that is currently se-  
❒ To correct the number you  
have entered, use the {1}  
and {0} keys to highlight it,  
and then press the  
{Clear/Stop} key to clear the  
number.  
lected is displayed first.  
• "*" mark appears along with the  
option currently selected.  
• Use [↑] and [↓] to display the  
option you want to select.  
❒ You can also use the {#} key  
as well as the {1} and {0}  
keys to move selection.  
To select an original size from  
preset sizes  
C Press [OK].  
A While the preset original size  
you want to select is displayed,  
press [OK].  
This saves the setting you have  
entered, and returns to the De-  
fault Print Settings menu.  
This saves the setting you have  
selected, and returns to the De-  
fault Print Settings menu.  
Note  
❒ Pressing [Cancel] discards the  
values you have entered, and  
returns to the Default Print  
Settings menu.  
www.cnet.ie  
82  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Registering Print Settings  
N Press [Next], and then select an op- T When you are finished, press  
tion for "4. Duplex " in the same  
way that you have done in the  
[PrevMenu].  
This returns to the Scanner Fea-  
tures menu.  
steps through .  
D
F
O Press [Next], and then select an op-  
tion for "5. Reduce/Enlarge " in  
the same way that you have done  
U Press [Exit].  
in the steps through .  
L
M
Note  
❒ When you select the " Custom  
Ratio " option, use the number  
keys or [-] / [+] to enter the val-  
ue.  
3
This exits the Scanner Features  
menu, and returns to the standby  
screen that is displayed when you  
turn the power on.  
P By pressing [Next] to display "6.  
Create Margin " and "7. Quali-  
ty/Speed " as the setup item, select  
options for each of them in the  
same way that you have done in  
Important  
❒ Never turn off the power of this  
machine before the standby  
screen is displayed. Doing so  
can discard all the settings you  
have configured, and return this  
machine to its factory default  
status.  
steps through .  
D
F
Q After all the settings are the way  
you want, press [PrevMenu].  
This registers the print settings  
you have configured to the "De-  
fault" memory area, and returns to  
the Print Settings menu.  
R While the Print Settings menu is  
displayed, press {2}, {3} or {4}  
key to display a corresponding  
User Print Settings menu.  
For example, press the {2} key to  
display the User 1 Print Settings  
menu.  
S Repeat steps through for each  
D
Q
of " User 1", " User 2", and " User  
www.cnet.ie  
3" memory areas.  
83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuring the Scanner Settings  
Configuring Settings Using a Web Browser  
This section describes the procedure to make various settings using a web  
browser on a client computer.  
Important  
❒ Before making any settings, connect this nachine to the network and specify  
its IP address. p.55 “Configuring [System Settings]”  
❒ To confirm the IP address of this machine that you have specified, press the  
{User Tools} key, press the {1} key to select [1.System Settings], select [2.IP Ad-  
dress], and then press [OK]. When you are finished, press [Cancel], and then  
press the {User Tools} key to return to a standby screen.  
3
Accessing the Scanner  
System requirements of a client computer  
❖ OS  
• Microsoft Windows 95/98/98 SE/Me/2000 XP  
• Microsoft Windows Server 2003  
• Microsoft Windows NT4.0  
❖ Web browser  
• Microsoft Internet Explorer 4.0, 5.0, 5.5, 6.0  
When you use a proxy server, set the web browser not to use the proxy server  
when accessing this machine.  
When using Internet Explorer, you can make this setting by selecting [Internet  
Options] on the [Tools] menu, click [LAN Settings] on the [Connections] tab, and  
then select the [Bypass proxy server for local addresses] check box in the [Proxy  
Server] area. The setting can also be configured by entering the IP address of  
this machine to [Exceptions] box on the dialog box that appears when you click  
[Advanced] in the [Proxy Server] area.  
www.cnet.ie  
84  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Configuring Settings Using a Web Browser  
To access this machine from a web browser  
A Start up a web browser on a client computer.  
B Input “http://xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx/” (“xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx” is the IP address for this  
machine) in the web browser’s address bar, and then press the [Enter] key.  
The top page of the “Web Status Monitor” is displayed on the web browser,  
which means that you succeed in accessing to this machine.  
3
Note  
❒ The Web Status Monitor is embedded to this machine, so it is not necessary  
to install it to a client computer. You can use the Web Status Monitor to  
make settings or administrating the status of this machine.  
www.cnet.ie  
85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuring the Scanner Settings  
General guide to the Web Status Monitor  
The figure below shows a screen of the Web Status Monitor when the following  
menus are selected: [Configuration] main menu → [Basic Settings] sub-menu →  
[Scanner] sub-menu.  
3
ADG011S  
1. Header Area  
3. Sub-Menu Area  
Contains links to the top page and the on-  
line help of the Web Status Monitor.  
Displays sub-menu items in accordance  
with the main menu item currently se-  
lected. Clicking a sub-menu item dis-  
plays the contents of the item in the work  
area.  
2. Main Menu Area  
Contains main menu items such as [Sta-  
tus], [Config Reference] and [Configuration].  
Clicking a main menu item refreshes the  
sub-menu area, displaying sub-menu  
items that are included under the main  
menu item.  
4. Scroll bar for the Sub-Menu Area  
Use this scroll bar to scroll through the  
sub-menu area, when the lower or upper  
part of its content is out of sight.  
www.cnet.ie  
86  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Configuring Settings Using a Web Browser  
5. Work Area  
6. Scroll bars for the Work Area  
Displays contents such as setup items,  
options, and status information, in ac-  
cordance with the sub-menu item cur-  
rently selected.  
Use these scroll bars to scroll through the  
work area, when the lower/upper or  
rightmost/leftmost part of its content is  
out of sight.  
Important  
❒ It may not be possible to return to the previous page using the browser’s  
[Back] button. In such a case, click the [Update] button on the browser. If a  
main menu or a sub-menu is clicked again, the information you input will be  
cleared.  
❒ Depending on the font size setting, the contents may not be displayed prop-  
erly. It is recommended to set the font size to “medium” or smaller.  
3
Example Procedures Using [Configuration] Main Menu  
This section gives you a few example procedures, to make settings of this ma-  
chine using the Web Status Monitor.  
D
Click [Basic Settings], and then  
[Scan Settings] in the sub-menu ar-  
ea.  
Configuring [Scan Settings]  
A
B
C
Click [Configuration] on the main  
menu.  
E
F
Click [Default] in the [Select User]  
area.  
The password input dialog box  
appears.  
Make settings to each of the setup  
items on the screen.  
Note  
❒ Once you set the password, the  
password input dialog box will  
not appear from the second  
time. When the dialog doesn’t  
Note  
❒ Register the scanning condi-  
tions that are most frequently  
used in [Default]. If scanning  
conditions are not specified for  
a send scan operation, the con-  
ditions set to [Default] applies.  
appear, proceed to .  
D
Input “scanner” for the user name,  
and input the password.  
Note  
G
Click [OK].  
❒ The user name is fixed to “scan-  
ner”.  
Note  
❒ Be sure to click [OK] to save the  
settings you have made on the  
currently displayed screen.  
Once you move to another page  
without clicking [OK], all the  
settings that you have made on  
the previous page will be  
cleared.  
❒ The password is set to “pass-  
word” as the factory default.  
You can change the password  
using [Configuration] → [Basic  
Settings] → [Scan Settings].  
Click [OK].  
The setup screen appears.  
www.cnet.ie  
87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Configuring the Scanner Settings  
❒ The changes are be discarded if  
you click [Cancel].  
To register an e-mail address  
A Click [Add].  
H By selecting [User 1], [User 2], or  
[User 3] in the [Select User] area, re-  
B Make entry to or select an op-  
tion for each of the setup items  
on the screen.  
peat steps and  
for each of  
F
G
them, as necessary.  
C Click [OK].  
Configuring [E-mail Address]  
Note  
❒ Be sure to click [OK] to save  
the settings you have made  
on the currently displayed  
screen. Once you move to an-  
other page without clicking  
[OK], all the settings that you  
have made on the previous  
page will be cleared.  
A Click [Configuration] on the main  
3
menu.  
The password input dialog box ap-  
pears.  
Note  
❒ Once you set the password, the  
password input dialog box will  
not appear from the second  
time. When the dialog doesn’t  
❒ Input information is cleared  
when you click [Cancel].  
appear, proceed to  
D
To change an existing e-mail  
address  
B
Enter “scanner” for the user name,  
and enter password.  
A Display the item that you want  
to change within the list on the  
screen.  
Note  
❒ The user name is fixed to “scan-  
ner”.  
Note  
❒ The password is set to “pass-  
word” as the factory default.  
You can change the password  
using [Configuration] → [Basic  
Settings] → [Password].  
❒ You can select the number of  
items to be displayed at a  
time by selecting a number in  
the [Display Items] box.  
❒ Click [Next] or [Prev] to dis-  
play the next or previous  
page. Click [Top] or [End] to  
display the first or last page.  
C Click [OK].  
Settings screen appears.  
D Click [E-mail Settings], and then [E-  
mail Address] in the sub-menu ar-  
ea.  
❒ If you want to display a spe-  
cific page, enter the page  
number in the [Page(s)] box,  
and then press [Go].  
E Follow the steps below to register  
an e-mail address, change or de-  
lete an existing e-mail address, ex-  
port address data to a CSV file, or  
import address data from a CSV  
file.  
B Select the item that you want to  
change, by clicking the option  
button to the left of the item.  
C Click [Change].  
D Make necessary changes.  
E Click [OK].  
www.cnet.ie  
88  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Configuring Settings Using a Web Browser  
Note  
To export the address data to a  
CSV file  
❒ Be sure to click [OK] to save  
the settings you have made  
on the currently displayed  
screen. Once you move to an-  
other page without clicking  
[OK], all the settings that you  
have made on the previous  
page will be cleared.  
A Click [Export].  
The [Export Data] page appears.  
B Click the [Download] button to  
the right of [Entered Program In-  
formation].  
C On the dialog box that appear,  
select [Save this file to disk], and  
then click [OK].  
❒ The changes are discarded if  
[Cancel] is clicked.  
3
Note  
To delete an existing e-mail  
address  
❒ The above dialog box varies  
depending on the version of  
the operating system (Win-  
dows). When a save dialog  
box appears here, click [Save]  
here.  
A Display the item that you want  
to delete within the list on the  
screen.  
Note  
The [Save As] dialog box ap-  
pears.  
❒ You can select the number of  
items to be displayed at a  
time by selecting a number in  
the [Display Items] box.  
D Specify a file name and the lo-  
cation to save the file, and then  
click [Save].  
❒ Click [Next] or [Prev] to dis-  
play the next or previous  
page. Click [Top] or [End] to  
display the first or last page.  
Note  
❒ The default name that is au-  
tomatically assigned to the  
file is “<device name_addr  
.csv”. For “<device name”,  
the name that is specified for  
the machine’s device name is  
used. (You can specify the  
device name using [Configura-  
tion] → [Basic Settings] →  
[General Settings] → [Device  
Name].)  
❒ If you want to display a spe-  
cific page, enter the page  
number in the [Page(s)] box,  
and then press [Go].  
B Select the item that you want to  
delete, by clicking the option  
button to the left of the item.  
C Click [Delete].  
D On the confirmation dialog  
box that appears, click [OK] to  
delete the item.  
This returns to the [Export Data]  
page.  
www.cnet.ie  
89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Configuring the Scanner Settings  
Note  
Note  
❒ When the [Close this dialog  
when download completes]  
check box is not selected on  
the dialog box that appears  
when you click [Save], the di-  
alog box remains displayed  
after download is finished. In  
this case, press [Close] to  
close the dialog box and re-  
turn to the [Export Data] page.  
❒ It is good idea to start with the  
CSV file that is exported using  
the Web Status Monitor. You  
can use the file exported using  
[Entered Program Information] for  
adding, changing or deleting  
the address data. It becomes  
much easier to update the ad-  
dress book information by im-  
porting the edited file. See the  
Web Status Monitor Help for  
more information.  
3
E If you want to export title in-  
formation (device tag informa-  
tion), click the [Download]  
button to the right of [Device  
Tag Information ].  
Reference  
For information about the file  
format of the CSV file, see p.191  
“E-mail Address Book Data  
Format and Device Tag Infor-  
mation”  
F Repeat steps C and D to save  
the device tag information.  
Note  
A Prepare a CSV file that you  
want to use for importing the  
address data, and save it on a  
local disk or in a shared folder  
on your network.  
❒ The default name that is au-  
tomatically assigned to the  
file is “<device name>  
_taginfo.csv”. For “<device  
name>”, the name that is  
specified for the machine’s  
device name is used. (You  
can specify the device name  
using [Configuration] → [Basic  
Settings] → [General Settings]  
→ [Device Name].)  
B Click [Import].  
The [Import Data] page appears.  
C Click [Browse], select the CSV  
file that you have prepared,  
and then click [Open].  
D On the [Import Data] page, click  
[OK].  
To import the address data from a  
CSV file  
A confirmation dialog box for a  
batch registration of the address  
book appears.  
Limitation  
E Click [OK].  
❒ If you perform the following  
procedures, the current address  
data is overwritten with the ad-  
dress data that you import. Be-  
fore importing the address data,  
be sure to export the current ad-  
dress data for a backup.  
When the import operation is fin-  
ished, the message “ Programmed  
Address Book as a batch.  
Click [Back] to continue.  
” appears.  
F Click [Back] on the web brows-  
er.  
www.cnet.ie  
90  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring Settings Using a Web Browser  
Note  
Note  
❒ To return to the E-mail Ad-  
dress screen, click [Back]  
again, or click [E-mail Address]  
in the sub-menu area.  
❒ If “ On ” is selected for [Auto Up-  
date Destination List], the destina-  
tion list is automatically  
updated when you press [OK] in  
step above. You can instantly  
E
F If “ Off ” is selected for [Auto Up-  
date Destination List] in [2.Send Scan  
Settings] on this machine, restart  
this machine to reflect additions  
and changes made to the destina-  
tion list.  
use the updated destination list  
by pressing [Dest.] or [Sender] on  
the control panel of this ma-  
chine. See p.61 “Auto Update  
Destination List” for details.  
3
Information to Register as Destination and Printer  
You can register [E-mail Address], [File Send Path] and [FTP Server] as destinations  
for sending scan data. This section describes the setup items included in these  
sub-menus.  
This section also explains the setup items that are included in [Printer], which de-  
termines a printer for Print Scan output.  
See the Web Status Monitor Help for information about setup items that are not  
described here.  
❖ Key Display  
The key display is used for select-  
Information to register in [E-mail  
Address]  
ing a destination (or sender) on the  
control panel of this machine. Reg-  
You can register destination address-  
ister a key display name within 16  
es to which you use for sending  
characters. The first 16 characters  
scanned data as an e-mail attachment.  
of the name that you have regis-  
Up to 2000 e-mail addresses can be  
tered to [Name(s)] are automatically  
registered.  
used if you skip registering a key  
display name.  
❖ Program No.  
Enter a number for the e-mail ad-  
❖ Assign Title  
dress between 00001 and 50000.  
You can assign an item under the  
You cannot enter a number al-  
following three types of titles for  
ready used.  
recalling the destination’s (or  
sender’s) key display name quick-  
ly on the control panel of this ma-  
chine.  
Note  
❒ The first unused number is dis-  
played as the default.  
• Alphabet  
❖ Name(s)  
[ABC], [DEF], [GHI], [JKL], [MNO],  
[PQRS], [TUV], [WXYZ]  
The name specified here is used for  
recognizing each of the registered  
destinations (or senders) on the  
Web Status Monitor. Register a  
• Custom Title  
[1], [2], [3], [4], [5]  
www.cnet.ie  
name within 20 characters.  
91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Configuring the Scanner Settings  
• Frequently Used Title(s)  
Select “ On ” if you want the  
item to be included in the [Freq.]  
page, which is displayed as the  
first title for both the alphabeti-  
cal and custom title lists. Select “  
Off ” if you do not want the item  
in the [Freq.] page.  
Information to register in [File Send  
Path]  
You can register a path for sending  
scanned data to a shared folder using  
SMB. Up to 1000 destination folders  
can be registered.  
Reference  
Important  
See the Web Status Monitor Help  
for information about how to reg-  
ister a File Send Path.  
❒ Before assigning a custom title,  
it is necessary to register custom  
titles using the Web Status Mon-  
itor, and restart this machine.  
You cannot configure [E-mail Ad-  
dress] and [Custom Title] settings  
at the same time.  
3
❖ Program No.  
Enter a number for the destination  
folder between 00001 and 50000.  
You cannot enter a number al-  
ready used.  
Note  
❒ Under each of the titles, the as-  
signed items are listed by the or-  
der of registration.  
Note  
❒
The first unused program number  
is displayed as the default.  
❖ E-mail  
❖ File Send Path Name  
• E-mail Address  
Enter a name for identifying the  
destination folder, using up to 80  
characters.  
Enter the e-mail address used as  
the destination.  
• Register as Sender  
❖ Key Display  
Select whether to use the e-mail  
address not only as the destina-  
tion but as the sender also.  
Enter the name to appear on the  
control panel of this machine, us-  
ing up to 16 characters. The first 16  
characters of the file send path  
name are automatically used if you  
skip registering a key display  
name.  
• Sender's Password  
Select whether to set a pass-  
word for the e-mail address.  
When [On] is selected, a pass-  
word is required when this e-  
mail address is specified as the  
destination.  
❖ Assign Title  
You can assign a file send path  
record under the following three  
types of titles for recalling the key  
display name quickly on the con-  
trol panel of this machine.  
• Protected Password and Con-  
firm Protected Password  
Enter the password when [On] is  
selected for [Sender's Password],  
using four to eight digits.  
Each password digit appears as  
"*".  
• Alphabet  
[ABC], [DEF], [GHI], [JKL], [MNO],  
[PQRS], [TUV], [WXYZ]  
• Custom Title  
[1], [2], [3], [4], [5]  
www.cnet.ie  
92  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Configuring Settings Using a Web Browser  
• Frequently Used Title(s)  
Select “ On ” if you want the file  
send path record to be included  
in the [Freq.] page, which is dis-  
played as the first title for both  
the alphabetical and custom ti-  
tle lists. Select “ Off ” if you do  
not want the item in the [ Freq. ]  
page.  
❒ When the shared folder you  
register is configured an ac-  
cess right by Windows  
2000/XP, Windows Server  
2003, or Windows NT4.0, en-  
ter the user name that is spec-  
ified as the administrator of  
the operating system. l  
❒ When the shared folder you  
register is on a client compu-  
ter, enter a user name availa-  
ble for logging in to the  
network.  
Important  
❒ Before assigning a custom title,  
it is necessary to register custom  
titles using the Web Status Mon-  
itor, and restart this machine.  
You cannot configure [File Send  
Path] and [Custom Title] settings  
at the same time.  
3
• Login Password and Confirm  
Login Password  
Enter the password for the user  
name displayed in the [Login  
User Name] box. Each password  
character appears as "*".  
Note  
❒ Under each of the records, the  
assigned items are listed by the  
order of registration.  
Note  
❒ When accessing a shared  
folder that is password pro-  
tected under Windows  
95/98/98 SE/Me, enter the  
password.  
❖ File Send  
• File Send Path  
Enter the path to the destination  
in the format of "\\host  
name\folder name" or "\\IP  
address\folder name".  
• [Test]  
Click this button to confirm the  
availability of the entries to the  
[File Send Path], [Login User  
Name], and [Login Password] box-  
es.  
Note  
❒ Be sure to specify folders that  
are on the root directory of a  
host computer. You cannot  
specify any sub-directories  
for “folder name” in the  
above syntax.  
• Sender's Password  
Select whether to set a pass-  
word for the destination folder.  
When [On] is selected, a pass-  
word is required when this  
folder is specified as the desti-  
nation.  
• Login User Name  
Enter a user name with shared  
folder access, in the format of  
"work group name\user name"  
or "domain name\user name".  
• Protected Password and Con-  
firm Protected Password  
Enter the password when [On] is  
selected for [Sender's Password],  
using four to eight digits.  
Each password digit appears as  
"*".  
Note  
❒ When the shared folder you  
register is on a file server, en-  
ter a user name available for  
logging in to the file server.  
www.cnet.ie  
93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring the Scanner Settings  
❖ Change Order  
Note  
This item is displayed only when  
you perform [Change] in “ File  
Send Path ”operation. Normally,  
the File Send Paths you registered  
using [Add] in “ File Send Path ” are  
displayed by the order of registra-  
tion. If you want to change the or-  
der of a registered File Send Path,  
select “ On ” for [Change Order], and  
then enter the number of the new  
order (that applies when you select  
“ All ” in a title list screen of the  
machine) into [Change Order] box.  
❒
The first unused program number  
is displayed as the default.  
❖ FTP Server Name  
Enter a name for identifying the  
FTP server address, using up to 80  
characters.  
❖ Key Display  
Enter the name to appear on the  
control panel, using up to 16 char-  
acters. The first 16 characters of the  
FTP server name are automatically  
used if you skip registering a key  
display name.  
3
Note  
❒ If you enter “5” into [Move to]  
box and perform [Change Order]  
operation for the File Send Path  
that is currently displayed in  
the 15th place when you select “  
All ” in a title list screen of the  
machine, the File Send Path  
moves to the 5th place. At this  
time, the File Send Paths that  
are formerly displayed in the  
5th through 14th places move to  
the 6th through 15th places, re-  
spectively.  
❖ Assign Title  
You can assign an FTP server  
record under the following three  
types of titles for recalling the key  
display name quickly on the con-  
trol panel of this machine.  
• Alphabet  
[ABC], [DEF], [GHI], [JKL], [MNO],  
[PQRS], [TUV], [WXYZ]  
• Custom Title  
[1], [2], [3], [4], [5]  
• Frequently Used Title(s)  
Select “ On ” if you want the  
FTP server record to be includ-  
ed in the [Freq.] page, which is  
displayed as the first title for  
both the alphabetical and cus-  
tom title lists. Select “ Off ” if  
you do not want the item in the  
[Freq.] page.  
Information to register in [FTP Server]  
You can register an FTP server ad-  
dress for sending scanned data to a  
shared folder on the FTP server. Up to  
1000 FTP server addresses can be reg-  
istered.  
Reference  
Important  
See the Web Status Monitor Help  
for information about how to reg-  
ister an FTP Server address.  
❒ Before assigning a custom title,  
it is necessary to register custom  
titles using the Web Status Mon-  
itor, and restart this machine.  
You cannot configure [FTP Serv-  
er] and [Custom Title] settings at  
the same time.  
❖ Program No.  
Enter a number for the FTP server  
address between 00001 and 50000.  
You cannot enter a number al-  
ready used.  
www.cnet.ie  
94  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Configuring Settings Using a Web Browser  
• Login Password and Confirm  
Login Password  
Note  
❒ Under each of the records, the  
assigned items are listed by the  
order of registration.  
Enter the password for the user  
name displayed in the [Login  
User Name] box.  
❖ FTP Server  
Note  
• Server Name/Path Name  
Enter the path to the FTP server  
shared folder, in the format of  
"server name\folder name" or  
"IP address\folder name".  
❒ A login password is regis-  
tered using up to 14 charac-  
ters on the Web Status  
Monitor. Specify login pass-  
word within 14 characters on  
the FTP server, to which you  
want to send scanned files  
from this machine.  
3
Note  
❒ Be sure to specify folders that  
are on the root directory of  
an FTP server. You cannot  
specify any sub-directories  
for “folder name” in the  
above syntax.  
• [Test]  
Click this button to confirm the  
availability of the entries to the  
[Server Name/Path Name], [Login  
User Name], and [Login Password]  
boxes.  
Note  
❒ When you connect to an FTP  
server using a specific port,  
enter the port number in dec-  
imal followed by “:” after  
server name (or IP address).  
If you do not specify a port  
number, the default port  
number (21) is automatically  
applies.  
• PASV Mode Configuration  
Select whether to use the PASV  
mode to send a file.  
The default is [Off]. If you can  
log on to the specified FTP serv-  
er but cannot send a file, select  
[On].  
Note  
❒ This machine does not sup-  
port connection to an FTP  
server via a proxy server.  
• Login User Name  
Enter a user name with shared  
folder access.  
• Sender's Password  
Note  
Select whether to set a pass-  
word for the FTP server ad-  
dress.  
When [On] is selected, a pass-  
word is required when this FTP  
server address is specified as  
the destination.  
❒ A login user name is regis-  
tered using up to 20 charac-  
ters on the Web Status  
Monitor. Specify login user  
names within 20 characters  
on the FTP server, to which  
you want to send scanned  
files from this machine.  
• Protected Password and Con-  
firm Protected Password  
Enter the password when [On] is  
selected for [Sender's Password],  
using four to eight digits.  
Each password digit appears as  
"*".  
www.cnet.ie  
95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring the Scanner Settings  
Information to register in [Printer]  
You can register up to 99 printers including local printers.  
Note  
❒ You cannot select a paper tray to supply paper when performing a Print Scan  
operation. To select a certain paper tray for Print Scan, it is necessary to reg-  
ister each of paper trays of a printer as an independent printer, by using [Con-  
figuration] → [Print Scan Settings] → [Printer] on the Web Status Monitor.  
Reference  
See the Web Status Monitor Help for information about how to register a  
printer.  
3
❖ Program No.  
Assign a program number to each of printer registrations within the range of  
01 through 99. The smallest unused program number is automatically as-  
signed when you register a new printer. You can also change the program  
number manually.  
❖ Printer Name  
[Printer Name] is used for recognizing each of the registered printers on the  
Web Status Monitor when monitoring printout jobs. Enter a printer name  
within 80 characters.  
❖ Key Display  
Enter the name to appear on the control panel, using up to 16 characters. The  
first 16 characters of the printer name are automatically used if you skip reg-  
istering a key display name.  
Important  
❒ If you enter nothing into the [Key Display] box (by clearing the characters  
that are automatically entered) and then press [OK], the message “This pa-  
rameter does not have any changes” appears. Never leave the [Key Display]  
box empty.  
❖ Assign Title  
You can assign a printer under the following three types of titles for recalling  
the printer's key display name quickly on the control panel of this machine.  
• Alphabet  
[ABC], [DEF], [GHI], [JKL], [MNO], [PQRS], [TUV], [WXYZ]  
• Custom Title  
[1], [2], [3], [4], [5]  
• Frequently Used Title(s)  
Select " On " if you want the printer to be included in the [Freq.] page, which  
is displayed as the first title for both the alphabetical and custom title lists.  
Select " Off " if you do not want the printer in the [Freq.] page.  
www.cnet.ie  
96  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Configuring Settings Using a Web Browser  
Important  
❒ Before assigning a custom title, it is necessary to register custom titles us-  
ing the Web Status Monitor, and restart this machine. You cannot config-  
ure [Printer] and [Custom Title] settings at the same time.  
Note  
❒ Under each of the titles, the assigned printers are listed by the order of reg-  
istration.  
❖ Attachment Type  
Specify the type of connection method between the printer and this machine.  
3
• Local Printer  
Select this option when the printer is a local printer connected to this ma-  
chine using a USB cable.  
Note  
❒ You cannot use more than one printer as a local printer at the same time.  
When you connect two or more printers to the machine using USB ca-  
bles, the printer that is detected by this machine first is only available.  
• Network Printer  
Select this option when the printer is a network printer.  
❖ Printer IP Address  
When " Network Printer " is selected for [Attachment Type], enter the IP address  
of the printer in the form of xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx (xxx:0 through 255).  
Note  
❒ You cannot configure this setting using a host name.  
❒ Be sure to assign a fixed IP address even if you use the printer on a DHCP  
environment.  
❖ [Obtain Printer Information]  
Click to obtain paper tray information for the printer.  
For a network printer, be sure to enter the correct IP address, and then click  
[Obtain Printer Information].  
An error message appears if the IP address entered is incorrect. Enter the cor-  
rect IP address.  
❖ Default Printer  
Click [Yes] to set the printer as the default printer.  
Only one printer can be set as the default printer at a time.  
Note  
❒ When only one printer is registered, that printer is set as the default auto-  
matically.  
❒ If [Yes] is selected for this printer, the current default printer will no longer  
be the default.  
❒ If the setting for the current default printer is changed to [No], the error  
www.cnet.ie  
message appears. Set another printer as the default.  
97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring the Scanner Settings  
❖ Locked Print  
Select [On] to print scanned images only after a password is entered on the  
printer control panel. This prevents other people from seeing the prints.  
❖ Paper Source Tray  
Select a paper tray.  
Click [Obtain Printer Information] to update the list of available paper trays.  
For a network printer, be sure to enter the IP address in the box of [Attachment  
Type] first, and then click [Obtain Printer Information].  
❖ Change Order  
This item is displayed only when you perform [Change] in “ Printer ” opera-  
tion. Normally, the printers you registered using [Add] in “ Printer ” are dis-  
played by the order of registration. If you want to change the order of a  
registered printer, select " On " for [Change Order], and then enter the number  
of the new order (that applies when you select " All " in a title list screen of the  
machine) into [Move to] box.  
3
Note  
❒ If you enter "5" into [Move to] box and perform [Change Order] operation for  
the printer that is currently displayed in the 15th place when you select  
"All" in a title list screen of the machine, the printer moves to the 5th place.  
At this time, the printers that are formerly displayed in the 5th through  
14th places move to the 6th through 15th places, respectively.  
Recalling the Settings  
You can recall the current settings of this machine for confirmation, by using the  
Web Status Monitor.  
To recall the settings  
A Click [Config Reference] on the  
main menu.  
B Click the item that you want to re-  
call in the sub-menu area.  
www.cnet.ie  
98  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Configuring Settings Using a Web Browser  
Creating a Backup File of All the Settings  
It is possible to store the settings such as scanning conditions as a file in a shared  
folder on the network. This file can be used to restore the settings in case they  
are lost. In addition, if you use two or more units of this scanner, it is possible to  
configure necessary settings on only one unit and copy the settings to other  
units.  
Setup items to be backed-up and  
restored  
To create a backup file  
3
A Click [Configuration] on the main  
You can create a backup file that con-  
tains all the settings included under  
the [Configuration] main menu (except  
[Backup] in the [Basic Settings] sub-  
menu), and the settings can be re-  
stored using the backup file.  
menu.  
The password input dialog box ap-  
pears.  
Note  
❒ Once you set the password, the  
password input dialog box will  
not appear from the second  
time. When the dialog doesn’t  
Even the settings that are configured  
by using the control panel of this ma-  
chine are backed up, as long as the  
settings are included under the [Con-  
figuration] main menu of the Web Sta-  
appear, proceed to .  
D
tus Monitor. Note, however, that B Enter “scanner” for the user name  
there are setup items that can only be  
configured by using the control panel  
of this machine. These setup items are  
not included in the backup file.  
and enter the password.  
Note  
❒ The user name is fixed to “scan-  
ner”.  
Note  
❒ The password is set to “pass-  
word” as the factory default.  
You can change the password  
using [Configuration] → [Basic  
Settings] → [Password].  
❒ You cannot specify the items to be  
backed up or restored separately.  
❒ When you use a backup file to  
copy the settings to another unit, it  
is necessary to change the settings  
that must be unique for each of the  
units, such as an IP address setting.  
C Click [OK].  
The setup screen appears.  
D Click [Basic Settings], and then  
[Backup] in the sub-menu area.  
www.cnet.ie  
99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Configuring the Scanner Settings  
E Enter each of the items on the F When everything is the way you  
screen.  
want, click [Backup].  
Note  
❖ File Send Path  
❒ Click [Cancel] to restore the  
former settings on the screen.  
Enter the shared folder path for  
storing the backup file. Enter  
the path in the format of  
"\\host name\folder name" or  
"\\IP address\folder name".  
After a backup file is created, the  
message “ Backup has succeed-  
ed.” appears.  
Note  
G Confirm that the backup file is  
created in the folder you have  
specified, by using the Windows  
explorer.  
❒ The specified IP address is ef-  
fective only for the computer  
running Windows 2000/XP  
or Windows NT as operating  
system. An IP address cannot  
be specified for a host run-  
ning Windows 98/Me as op-  
erating system.  
3
To restore settings from a backup file  
A Click [Configuration] on the main  
menu.  
❖ Login User Name  
The password input dialog box ap-  
pears.  
Enter a user name with shared  
folder access, in the format of  
"work group name\user name"  
or "domain name\user name".  
Note  
❒ Once you set the password, the  
password input dialog box will  
not appear from the second  
time. When the dialog doesn’t  
❖ Login Password  
Enter the password for the user  
name displayed in the [Login  
User Name] box. Each password  
character appears as "*".  
appear, proceed to .  
D
B You can change the password us-  
ing [Configuration] → [Basic Set-  
tings] → [Password].  
Note  
❒ If you are running Windows  
98/Me and a shared folder  
password is required, enter  
it.  
Note  
❒ The user name is fixed to “scan-  
ner”.  
❒ The password is set to “pass-  
word” as the factory default.  
You can change the password  
using [Configuration] [Basic  
Settings] [Password].  
❖ [Test]  
Click to check whether connec-  
tion to the specified shared fold-  
er is enabled when data is  
entered in the [File Send Path],  
[Login User Name], and [Login  
Password] boxes.  
C Click [OK].  
The setup screen appears.  
❖ Backup File Name  
Enter a file name for the backup  
file. Enter a name using up to 20  
D Click [Basic Settings], and then  
[Backup] in the sub-menu area.  
www.cnet.ie  
characters.  
100  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Configuring Settings Using a Web Browser  
❖ Backup File Name  
E Enter each of the items on the  
Enter the backup file name from  
which you want to restore the  
settings. Enter a name using up  
to 20 characters.  
screen.  
❖ File Send Path  
Enter the path to the shared  
folder where the backup file is  
stored. Enter the path in the for-  
mat of "\\host name\folder  
name" or "\\IP address\folder  
name".  
F When everything is the way you  
want, click [Restore].  
Note  
❒ Click [Cancel] to restore the  
former settings on the screen.  
Note  
3
After a restore operation is com-  
plete, the message “Restore has  
succeeded” appears.  
❒ The specified IP address is ef-  
fective only for the computer  
running Windows 2000/XP  
or Windows NT as operating  
system. An IP address cannot  
be specified for a host run-  
ning Windows 98/Me as op-  
erating system.  
G Turn off the power of this ma-  
chine, and then back on.  
This applies the settings that are  
restored from the backup file to  
this machine.  
❖ Login User Name  
Enter a user name with shared  
folder access, in the format of  
"work group name\user name"  
or "domain name\user name".  
❖ Login Password  
Enter the password for the user  
name displayed in the [Login  
User Name] box.  
Each password character ap-  
pears as "*".  
Note  
❒ If you are running Windows  
98/Me and a shared folder  
password is required, enter  
it.  
❖ [Test]  
Click to check whether connec-  
tion to the specified shared fold-  
er is enabled when data is  
entered in the [File Send Path],  
[Login User Name], and [Login  
Password] boxes.  
www.cnet.ie  
101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuring the Scanner Settings  
Installing Software  
To use this machine as a network TWAIN scanner, it is necessary that the net-  
work TWAIN driver is installed on the computer from which you use this ma-  
chine.  
To use the machine as a network delivery scanner, it is essential to install Scan-  
Router V2 Lite on the delivery server. To check an in-tray or retrieve file, it is nec-  
essary to install DeskTopBinder V2 Lite on the client computer.  
List of Files  
3
CD-  
RO  
M
Driv  
e
Wizard for the TWAIN driver and utilities  
TWAIN driver for Windows 95/98/Me, Windows XP, Win-  
dows 2000, Windows NT 4.0  
DRIV-  
ERS  
TWAIN  
Desk Top Binder V2 Lite  
Scan Router V2 Lite  
UTILITY  
DESKLT  
ROUTE  
RV2  
SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin, SmartDeviceMonitor for Cli-  
ent  
NET-  
WORK  
DEV-  
MON  
Auto Run Program  
When the CD-ROM is inserted into a client computer in Windows  
95/98/Me,Windows XP, Windows 2000, or Windows NT 4.0, the installer starts  
automatically(Auto Run) to install the TWAIN driver and various software.  
Note  
❒ Auto Run might not automatically work with certain operating system set-  
tings.In this case, launch “Setup.exe” located in the CD-ROM root directory.  
❒ If you want to install the software without using Auto Run, hold down the  
{Shift} key while inserting the CD-ROM. Keep the {Shift} key held down until  
the client computer has finished accessing the CD-ROM.  
❒ If [Cancel] is pressed during installation, the installation will be stopped and  
all the remaining software will not be installed. If [Cancel] has been pressed,  
reinstall the remaining software after restarting the client computer.  
Limitation  
❒ For installation in Windows 2000, Windows XP, or Windows NT 4.0, log in as  
a member of the administrators group.  
www.cnet.ie  
102  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Installing Software  
Software for Using a Network TWAIN Scanner  
To use the machine as a network TWAIN scanner, it is essential to install the  
TWAIN driver.  
If you do not have applications that work with TWAIN, it is necessary to also  
install DeskTopBinder V2 Lite. For information about the installation of Desk-  
TopBinder V2 Lite, see p.105 “DeskTopBinder V2 Lite”.  
• Network protocol  
System requirements  
TCP/IP  
3
Limitation  
Using Windows 95/98/Me, Windows XP,  
❒ Under Windows NT with RISC-  
Windows 2000, or Windows NT 4.0  
based processors (MIPS R series,  
Alpha AXP, or PowerPC), this  
Install the TWAIN driver using Auto  
driver is not available.  
Run.  
• Hardware  
A Start Windows, and then insert  
the supplied CD-ROM labeled  
“Scanner Driver & Document  
Management Utilities” into the  
CD-ROM drive of the client com-  
puter.  
PC/AT compatible  
• CPU  
Pentium or faster (Pentium 150  
MHz or faster recommended)  
• Operating system  
Microsoft Windows 95 (OSR 2 or  
later)  
The CD-ROM Launcher screen ap-  
pears.  
Microsoft Windows 98  
Microsoft Windows Millennium  
Edition (Windows Me)  
Microsoft Windows 2000 Profes-  
sional  
Microsoft Windows 2000 Server  
Microsoft Windows XP Home Edi-  
tion  
Reference  
If the installer does not start au-  
tomatically, see p.102 “Auto  
Run Program”.  
B Click [TWAIN Driver].  
The Software Setup screen ap-  
pears.  
Microsoft Windows XP Profes-  
sional  
Microsoft Windows NT Worksta-  
tion 4.0 (Service Pack 5 or later)  
Microsoft Windows NT Server 4.0  
(Service Pack 5 or later)  
C The installer of the TWAIN driv-  
er starts. Follow the instructions  
on the screen.  
Note  
• Memory  
❒ When the installation is com-  
plete, a message to prompt you  
to restart the client computer  
may appear. In this case, restart  
the client computer.  
Operating system min. operation  
memory + 8 MB (64 MB or more  
recommended)  
• Hard disk space  
100 MB or more  
• Display resolution  
800 × 600 pixels, 256 colours or  
www.cnet.ie  
higher  
103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Configuring the Scanner Settings  
❒ After the installation is com-  
plete, the “Type 2232C_2238C  
TWAIN V3” folder is in the  
“Program” folder on the Start  
menu. Help can be displayed  
from here.  
❒ Notes on using the network  
TWAIN scanner are provided in  
“Readme.txt”. Be sure to read  
them before use.  
Software for Using the Network Delivery Scanner Function  
Use Auto Run for installation.  
3
System requirements  
• Hardware  
PC/AT compatible  
• CPU  
Pentium 133 MHz or faster (Pentium II 266 MHz or faster recommended)  
• Operating system  
Microsoft Windows 95 (OSR 2 or later)  
Microsoft Windows 98  
Microsoft Windows Millennium Edition (Windows Me)  
Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional (Service Pack 1 or later)  
Microsoft Windows 2000 Server (Service Pack 1 or later)  
Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition  
Microsoft Windows XP Professional  
Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Standard Edition  
Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Enterprise Edition  
Microsoft Windows Server 2003 Web Edition  
Microsoft Windows NT Workstation 4.0 (Service Pack 5 or later)  
Microsoft Windows NT Server 4.0 (Service Pack 5 or later)  
• Memory  
48 MB or more (128 MB or more recommended)  
• Hard disk space  
50 MB or more (200 MB or more recommended)  
• Display resolution  
800 × 600 pixels, 64K colours or higher  
• Network protocol  
TCP/IP  
A Start Windows, and then insert the supplied CD-ROM labeled “Scanner  
Driver & Document Management Utilities” into the CD-ROM drive of the  
client computer.  
The CD-ROM Launcher screen appears.  
B Click the key of the software to be installed.  
www.cnet.ie  
• Click [ScanRouter V2 Lite], and then the ScanRouter V2 Lite Setup screen ap-  
pears.  
104  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Installing Software  
• Click [DeskTopBinder V2 Lite], and then the DeskTopBinder V2 Lite Setup  
screen appears.  
C Click [ScanRouter V2 Lite] or [DeskTopBinder V2 Lite]. The installer of the soft-  
ware starts. Follow the instructions on the screen.  
Reference  
For information about the subsequent installation procedure, see Setup  
Guide that can be displayed from the Setup screen of the respective soft-  
ware.  
3
DeskTopBinder V2 Lite  
Use Auto Run for installation.  
System requirements  
Limitation  
❒ When installing the software in Windows NT Server or Windows 2000 Serv-  
er, a stand-alone server must be used. Do not use the primary domain con-  
troller or backup domain controller.  
❒ If you install this software in an operating system, such as Windows NT  
Workstation and Windows 2000 Professional, in which a client server is not  
permitted to be used in a network, you may violate the license agreement of  
Microsoft Corporation.  
❒ Under Windows Server 2003, this software is not available.  
• Hardware  
PC/AT compatible  
• CPU  
Pentium 200 MHz or faster (Pentium II 350 MHz or faster recommended)  
• Operating system  
Microsoft Windows 95 (OSR 2 or later)  
Microsoft Windows 98  
Microsoft Windows Millennium Edition  
Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional (Service Pack 1 or later)  
Microsoft Windows 2000 Server (Service Pack 1 or later)  
Microsoft Windows XP Home Edition  
Microsoft Windows XP Professional  
Microsoft Windows NT Workstation 4.0 (Service Pack 5 or later)  
Microsoft Windows NT Server 4.0 (Service Pack 5 or later)  
• Memory  
64 MB or more (128 MB or more recommended)  
• Hard disk space  
Minimum free space required for installing: 200 MB  
www.cnet.ie  
105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Configuring the Scanner Settings  
Note  
❒ In addition to the space required for installation, the hard disk should have  
at least 500 MB of free space for files.  
• Network protocol  
TCP/IP  
A Start Windows, and then insert the supplied CD-ROM labeled “Scanner  
Driver & Document Management Utilities” into the CD-ROM drive of the  
client computer.  
The CD-ROM Launcher screen appears.  
3
B Click [DeskTopBinder V2 Lite].  
The DeskTopBinder V2 Lite Setup screen appears.  
C Click [DeskTopBinder V2 Lite]. The Installer of the DeskTopBinder V2 Lite  
starts. Follow the instructions on the screen.  
Reference  
For information about the subsequent installation procedure, see Setup  
Guide that can be displayed from the Setup screen of DeskTopBinder V2  
Lite.  
SmartDeviceMonitor  
About SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin and SmartDeviceMonitor for Client  
“ SmartDeviceMonitor for Admin ” is utility software for managing multiple  
scanners and printers on a network efficiently. Install this software on an admin-  
istrator computer if necessary.  
“ SmartDeviceMonitor for Client ” is utility software for the effective use of mul-  
tiple scanners and printers on a network with IP addresses. Install this software  
on a client computer as necessary.  
This soft-  
ware:  
Performs (related to  
scanners):  
Manages:  
To be installed on:  
SmartDe-  
viceMoni-  
tor for  
Multiple scanners and  
printers on the network  
•
•
Changing the device  
name *1  
Network administrator’s  
computer  
Changing the IP ad-  
dress *1  
Admin  
•
•
Displaying status  
Displaying status  
SmartDe-  
viceMoni-  
tor for  
Multiple scanners and  
printers on the network  
Each of client computers  
Client  
Web Status This machine  
Monitor  
•
Making various set-  
tings (see p.41 “Initial  
Scanner Setup”  
--  
www.cnet.ie  
106  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Installing Software  
*1  
You cannot use the Ethernet board setup tool included in the SmartDeviceMonitor  
for Admin when you access to this machine (it’s not possible to change the device  
name and the IP address of this machine). You can change the device name and the  
IP address of other devices.  
Installing SmartDeviceMonitor  
Use Auto Run for installation.  
A Start Windows, and then insert  
the supplied CD-ROM labeled  
“Scanner Driver & Document  
Management Utilities” into the  
CD-ROM drive of the computer.  
3
The CD-ROM Launcher screen ap-  
pears.  
B Click the key of the software to be  
installed.  
• Click [SmartDeviceMonitor for Ad-  
min], and then the SmartDevice-  
Monitor for Admin Setup  
screen appears.  
• Click [SmartDeviceMonitor for Cli-  
ent], and then the SmartDevice-  
Monitor for Client Setup screen  
appears  
C Follow the instructions on the  
screen.  
Note  
❒
After the installation is com-  
plete, the “ SmartDeviceMonitor  
for Admin ” or “ SmartDevice-  
Monitor for Client ” folder is in  
the “Program” folder on the  
Start menu. Help can be dis-  
played from here.  
❒ Notes on using the relevant  
software are provided in “Re-  
adme.txt”. Be sure to read them  
before use.  
www.cnet.ie  
107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Configuring the Scanner Settings  
3
www.cnet.ie  
108  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4. Setting Originals  
This chapter describes how to set an original to be scanned with this machine  
It is possible to set an original on the exposure glass or the ADF. To scan several  
pages successively, the ADF is convenient.  
Sizes and Weights of recommended  
Originals  
Where original is  
Original size  
Original weight  
set  
Exposure glass  
Up to A3(297mm×420mm)  
Up to 11″×17″  
41-128g/m2  
52-105g/m2  
ADF  
One  
side  
❖ Standard size  
Maximum : A3, S, 11″×17″ S  
Minimum : A5″ S  
Both  
sides  
❖ Non-standard size  
Maximum: 297 mm x 2000 mm  
(when scanning in binary), 297  
mm x 630 mm (when scanning in  
colour or gray scale)  
Minimum: 105 mm x 128 mm  
Note  
❒ To scan an original which siza is A5 or smaller, or which weight is 52g/m2 or  
lighter from the ADF using a network TWAIN driver, set [Location] to “ADF  
(thin paper)” on the application software you use the network TWAIN driver.  
For details, see the network TWAIN driver help.  
❒ When you perform a Send Scan (e-mail, Send File (SMB/FTP) or Delivery  
Server) or a Print Scan operation using the ADF, set [ADF Thin Paper] to “ On ”  
if the originals to be scanned are 52g/m2 (45kg) or thinner, or A5 size or small-  
er.  
www.cnet.ie  
109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Setting Originals  
❖ When set in the ADF  
Europe/Asia  
The Original Sizes Available  
for Auto Detection  
• A3S(297mm×420mm,  
11”×16.5”)  
• B4S(257mm×364mm,  
10.1”×14.3”)  
• A4S(210mm×297mm,  
8.3”×11”)  
The document sizes that are automat-  
ically detected by this machine are as  
follows  
Limitation  
❒ You can use auto detection for an  
ADF scanning, only when all the  
originals are the same, standard  
size.  
• A4R(297mm×210mm,  
11”×8.3”)  
• B5S(182mm×257mm,  
7.2”×10.1”)  
❖ When set on the exposure glass  
Europe/Asia  
• B5R(257mm×182mm,  
10.1”×7.2”)  
4
• A5S(148mm×210mm,  
5.8”×8.3”)  
• A3S(297mm×420mm,  
11”×16.5”)  
• A5R(210mm×148mm,  
8.3”×5.8”)  
• B4S(257mm×364mm,  
10.1”×14.3”)  
• 8.5”×13”S (F4)  
• A4S(210mm×297mm,  
8.3”×11”)  
• A4R(297mm×210mm,  
11”×8.3”)  
• B5S(182mm×257mm,  
7.2”×10.1”)  
• B5R(257mm×182mm,  
10.1”×7.2”)  
• 8”×13”S (F) *1  
North America  
• 11”×17”S (DLT)  
• 11”×15”S *2  
• 10”×14”S  
• 8.5”×14”S (LG)  
• 8”×13”S (F) *3  
• 8.5”×11”S (LT)  
• 8.5”×11”R (LT)  
• 10”×8”S *4  
• 8.5”×13”S (F4)  
• 8”×13”S (F) *1  
North America  
• 11”×17”S (DLT)  
• 11”×15”S *2  
• 10”×14”S  
• 5.5”×8.5”S (HLT)  
• 5.5”×8.5”R (HLT)  
*1  
Detected as F4 size.  
• 8.5”×14”S (LG)  
• 8.5”×11”S (LT)  
• 8.5”×11”R (LT)  
• 10”×8”S  
*2  
Detected as DLT size.  
*3  
Detected as LG size.  
*4  
Detected as LT size.  
Note  
*1  
Detected as F4 size.  
Detected as DLT size.  
❒ In some cases, scanning in colour  
may not be available even when  
you use originals shown above.  
For details, refer to the network  
TWAIN driver help or Readme.txt  
on the CD-ROM.  
*2  
www.cnet.ie  
110  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Sizes and Weights of recommended Originals  
Originals that Require Special Care  
When scanning the following types of originals, be sure to follow the descrip-  
tions below.  
❖ Originals whose size is difficult to auto detect  
It is difficult for this machine to automatically detect the sizes of the following  
types of originals, so select the original size manually.  
• Originals with indexes, tags, or other protrusions  
• Transparent originals such as OHP transparencies or translucent paper  
• Text or picture dense original  
• Originals containing solid images  
• Originals containing solid images around their edges  
4
❖ Originals that cannot be set in the ADF  
Placing the following types of originals in the ADF can cause paper misfeeds  
or result in damage to the originals. Place these originals on the exposure  
glass instead.  
• Stapled or clipped originals  
• Perforated or torn originals  
• Curled, folded, or creased originals  
• Pasted originals  
• Originals with any kind of coating, such as thermal fax paper, art paper,  
aluminum foil, carbon paper, or conductive paper  
• Originals with perforated lines  
• Originals with indexes, tags, or other projecting parts  
• Sticky originals such as translucent paper  
• Thin originals that have low stiffness  
• Thick originals such as postcards  
• Bound originals such as books  
• Transparent originals such as OHP transparencies or translucent paper  
• Originals with ink or correction liquid on them and still not completely dry  
• Originals that have curls such as shown in the illustration below  
www.cnet.ie  
ADG014S  
111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Setting Originals  
Original Orientation  
The original can be set either in sideway or lengthway orientation, but to assure  
that the top/bottom orientation of the original comes out correctly when the  
scanned file is displayed on a computer, the correct placement must be selected.  
The setting orientation differs depending on whether the width of the original is  
within or larger than 297mm (11.7”), which is equal to the length of the longer  
side of the A4-size.  
• Original width is within 297mm (11.7”)  
4
• Original width is wider than 297mm (11.7”)  
Note  
❒ Use the ADF when you perform duplex scanning.  
www.cnet.ie  
112  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Original Orientation  
Simplex Scanning  
The setting orientation differs depending on whether the width of original is  
within or larger than 297mm (11.7”).  
Original width  
297mm (11.7”) or less  
wider than 297mm (11.7”)  
Place the original so that the top Place the original so that the top  
edge touches the top-left of the  
exposure glass.  
edge touches the top-left of the  
exposure glass.  
When placing an original  
on the exposure glass  
⇒ p.116 “Placing the  
Original on the Exposure  
Glass”  
Place the top edge of the original Place the original so that the top  
4
first.  
edge is set on the far side of the  
original table.  
When placing originals  
on the ADF  
⇒ p.117 “Placing the  
Originals in the ADF”  
Set [Orientation:] to  
.
Set [Orientation:] to  
.
When the ADF is used, set [Side:] When the ADF is used, set [Side:]  
Setting when the net-  
work TWAIN driver is  
used  
to “ Simplex ”.  
to “ Simplex ”.  
Note  
Note  
❒ Set “ ADF ” or “ Platen glass ❒ Set “ ADF ” or “ Platen glass  
*1  
*1  
”
in [ Document: ].  
”
in [ Document: ].  
Select [ : 1 Sided].  
Select [ : 1 Sided].  
Settings for Send Scan  
(Use [Original Settings] in  
[Scan Settings] )  
Note  
❒
Because this is the initial val-  
ue of this setting, you do not  
need to change it.  
*1  
Contact glass: Select when scanning from the exposure glass.  
www.cnet.ie  
113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Setting Originals  
Settings for Print Scan in simplex scanning  
• When you perform a Print Scan operation while scanning one side of an orig-  
inal, set the original in the ADF as illustrated below, regardless of the width  
of the originals.  
4
ADG025S  
• Select (1 Sided Orig. → 1 Sided Print) or (1 Sided Orig. → 2 Sided Print) to per-  
form simplex scanning, by using [Duplex] under [5.Print Settings] on this ma-  
chine. See p.79 “Duplex” for details.  
Limitation  
❒ When you select 2-sided print, the printout orientation is fixed to top to  
top.  
Duplex Scanning  
When performing duplex scanning, place the originals in the ADF.  
The setting orientation differs depending on whether the width of the original is  
within or larger than 297mm (11.7”).  
Original width  
297mm (11.7”) or less  
wider than 297mm (11.7”)  
Place the original right side up, Place the original right side up, in  
top edge first.  
such a way that the top edge is  
set on the far side of the original  
table.  
When placing originals  
on the ADF  
⇒ p.117 “Placing the  
Originals in the ADF”  
When the original is bound on  
either side:  
When the original is bound on ei-  
ther side:  
Setting when the net-  
work TWAIN driver is  
used  
Set [Orientation:] to  
, [Side:] Set [Orientation:] to  
, [Side:]  
to “ Duplex (Top to Top) ”, and to “ Duplex (Top to Top) ”, and  
www.cnet.ie  
[Document:] to “ ADF ”.  
[Document:] to “ ADF ”.  
114  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Original Orientation  
Original width  
297mm (11.7”) or less  
wider than 297mm (11.7”)  
Settings for Send Scan  
(Use [Original Settings] in  
[Print Settings] )  
Select [ : 2 Sided: Top to Top].  
Select [ : 2 Sided: Top to Top].  
When the original is bound at  
the top:  
When the original is bound at the  
top:  
Setting when the net-  
work TWAIN driver is  
used  
Set [Orientation:] to  
to “ Duplex (Top to Bottom) ”,  
and [Document:] to “ ADF ”.  
, [Side:] Set [Orientation:] to  
, [Side:] to  
“ Duplex (Top to Bottom) ”, and  
[Document:] to “ ADF ”.  
4
Settings for Send Scan  
(Use [Original Settings] in  
[Print Settings] )  
[
: 2 Sided: Top to Bottom] [2 Sid-  
[
: 2 Sided: Top to Bottom ] [2 Sid-  
ed:TtoB].  
ed:TtoB].  
Settings for Print Scan in duplex scanning  
• When you perform a Print Scan operation while scanning both sides of orig-  
inals, set the originals in the ADF as illustrated below, regardless of the width  
of the originals.  
ADG025S  
• Select (2 Sided Orig. → 1 Sided Print) or (2 Sided Orig. → 2 Sided Print) to per-  
form duplex scanning, by using [Duplex] under [5.Print Settings] on this ma-  
chine. See p.79 “Duplex” for details.  
Limitation  
❒ When you select duplex scanning in a Print Scan operation, scanning of the  
originals is fixed to top to top. This means that the originals must be bound  
on either side.  
❒ When you select 2-sided print, the printout orientation is fixed to top to  
www.cnet.ie  
top.  
115  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Setting Originals  
❒ When the originals are bound at the top, or when you do not set the origi-  
nals as illustrated above, you’ll never have the printout results as expected.  
B
When the original width is wid-  
er than 297mm (11.7”)  
Placing the Original on the  
Exposure Glass  
Important  
❒ Be careful not to pinch your fingers  
when closing the ADF.  
❒ To activate the auto detection of an  
original, place the original after  
this machine starts up.  
ADG016S  
4
A
Lift the ADF.  
When a document is set in this  
direction, it is generally neces-  
sary to change the document  
setting direction at the point of  
transmission. ⇒ p.113 “Simplex  
Scanning”  
Note  
❒ Be sure to lift the exposure glass  
cover or ADF more than 30°.  
Otherwise, the size of the origi-  
nal might not be detected cor-  
rectly.  
C
Gently lower the ADF.  
B
With the side to be scanned facing  
down, place the original on the  
exposure glass, and align it with  
the home position and scale.  
Important  
❒ Do not press down on the expo-  
sure glass. Strong pressure on  
the exposure glass could cause  
it to break.  
A
When the original width is  
297mm (11.7”) or less  
ADG015S  
www.cnet.ie  
116  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Original Orientation  
Note  
Placing the Originals in the  
ADF  
❒ If the scan width is the same,  
you can set originals whose  
length differs from each other.  
The ADF allows you to place multiple  
originals at one time. Originals placed  
in the ADF can be scanned on one  
side or both sides.  
❒ The originals are scanned in se-  
quence, starting with the top  
page.  
A
When the original width is  
297mm (11.7”) or less  
❖ Precautions in placing an original in  
the ADF  
• For information about the origi-  
nals that cannot be placed in the  
ADF, see p.111 “Originals that  
cannot be set in the ADF”.  
4
Important  
❒ Attempting to use unsuitable  
originals in the ADF can lead  
to a misfeed and damage to  
the originals. Place such orig-  
inals directly on the exposure  
glass.  
ZEPY010J  
B
When the original width is wid-  
er than 297mm (11.7”)  
• Do not set originals in the ADF  
in excess of the upper limit  
mark.  
• See p.110 “The Original Sizes  
Available for Auto Detection”  
for information about the origi-  
nal sizes that can be detected  
automatically.  
• Fan the originals to get air be-  
tween the sheets before setting  
in the ADF.  
ZEPY020J  
Note  
❒ When both sides of an original  
are scanned, the original setting  
direction needs to be changed  
regardless of the setting direc-  
tion. ⇒ p.114 “Duplex Scan-  
ning”  
A
B
Adjust the side guides to the size  
of your originals.  
Place the originals face up (when  
performing duplex scans, front  
page up), and align them.  
For information about original  
orientation, see p.113 “Simplex  
Scanning” and p.114 “Duplex  
Scanning”  
www.cnet.ie  
117  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Setting Originals  
4
www.cnet.ie  
118  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5. Using the Network TWAIN  
Scanner Function  
This chapter describes the operations of DeskTopBinder V2 Lite for scanning  
originals by using this machine as a network TWAIN scanner. In addition, some  
functions of the network TWAIN driver are introduced.  
Procedure Breakdown  
The following overview diagram shows the flow of the steps for scanning orgin-  
als from a client computer using the network TWAIN driver.  
Menu may be different depending on the application  
Start a TWAIN-compliant appli-  
you use.  
cation.  
⇒ p.120 “Scanning Originals” A  
Menu and Procedure may be different depending on  
the application you use.  
Select the TWAIN driver.  
Place the originals.  
⇒ p.120 “Scanning Originals” A  
⇒ p.109 “Setting Originals”  
Menu and procedure may be different depending on  
the application you use.  
Start the network TWAIN driver.  
⇒ p.120 “Scanning Originals” C  
Select the scanner you want to  
use when multiple scanners are  
connected to the network.  
⇒ p.120 “Scanning Originals” C  
Make the scan settings.  
⇒ p.120 “Scanning Originals” C  
Click [Scan] on the Scanner Prop- ⇒ p.120 “Scanning Originals” D  
erty dialog box.  
Menu and procedure may be different depending on  
the application you use.  
Save the scanned image.  
⇒ p.120 “Scanning Originals” E  
www.cnet.ie  
119  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Using the Network TWAIN Scanner Function  
Scanning Originals  
This section explains how to scan  
originals using the network TWAIN  
scanner function.  
Note  
❒ The name of the scanner cur-  
rently being used is shown  
on the title bar of the dialog  
box. When multiple ma-  
chines are connected, make  
sure that the indicated ma-  
chine is the machine you  
want to use. If it is different,  
click [Select Scanner] to select  
the scanner again.  
A Start DeskTopBinder V2 Lite, and  
then select the scanner driver.  
A On the [Start] menu, point to  
[Program], point to [DeskTop-  
Binder V2], and then click [Desk-  
TopBinder V2].  
B Click [Scanner Settings...] on the  
[Tools] menu.  
❒ If the machine you want to  
use is not displayed in the  
list, make sure that the IP ad-  
dress is configured and that  
the machine is correctly con-  
nected to the network. If the  
machine is still not displayed  
in the list after confirming  
the above, consult with your  
network administrator.  
If the scanner is already select-  
ed, no scanner settings are nec-  
essary. Check the settings in the  
[File format for scanned image(s)]  
area, and then proceed to step  
E.  
5
C Click [Select Scanner Driver...].  
D Select the name of the machine  
you want to use in the [Source]  
list, and then click [Select...].  
B Depending on the type of orig-  
inal or the objective for scan-  
ning, click the appropriate  
button in [Mode].  
E Click [OK].  
B Place the original in the scanner.  
•
[Standard] is suitable for  
scanning standard originals  
that are comprised of mainly  
text.  
Reference  
⇒ p.109 “Setting Originals”  
C Make the scan settings.  
•
[Photo] is suitable for scan-  
ning originals that include  
photos, shaded illustrations,  
etc.  
A On the [File] menu, point to  
[Add Document], and then click  
[Scan...].  
The TWAIN driver starts.  
• [OCR] is suitable for conver-  
sion processing with an OCR  
(Optical Character Reading)  
application after scanning  
the original.  
After a short while, the dialog  
box of the TWAIN driver that  
operates the scanner appears.  
This dialog box is called the  
Scanner Properties dialog box.  
•
[Filing] is suitable for use  
with filing applications, etc.  
window. For information  
about the Detail window, see  
TWAIN driver Help.  
Note  
❒ For advanced settings, click  
www.cnet.ie  
[Detail] to display the Detail  
120  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Scanning Originals  
C According to the settings of  
[Document:] and [Orientation:],  
change the other setting of the  
[Document] group.  
D Click [Scan].  
When there are additional origi-  
nals to scan, place the original, and  
then click [Continue]. When there  
are no more originals, click [Com-  
plete].  
Reference  
For information about mak-  
ing settings for the [Docu-  
ment] group, see p.113  
“Simplex Scanning”, p.114  
“Duplex Scanning” and  
TWAIN driver Help.  
E Save the scan file in DeskTop-  
Binder V2 Lite.  
A On the [File] menu, click [Exit].  
B Enter the file name, and then  
click [OK].  
When you want to configure the  
scanning area  
The image is stored in DeskTop-  
Binder V2 Lite, and DeskTop-  
Binder Viewer closes.  
When you do not configure the  
scanning area, the area scanned is  
the size specified in the [Size:] box.  
5
-Editing and printing scan files  
A Click [Preview].  
With DeskTopBinder V2 Lite, it is  
possible to edit and print scan files.  
For more information about how to  
edit and print, see DeskTopBinder V2  
Lite Help.  
The original that was placed is  
scanned and the [Preview] dialog  
box appears. The scanning area  
in the preview is displayed  
within the broken lines.  
B Configure the scanning area by  
dragging a border or a corner.  
When reconfiguring the area,  
click and drag one corner of the  
area towards or away from its  
opposite corner.  
Note  
❒ Depending on the scanning  
resolution, the area to be  
scanned may be subject to re-  
strictions. For more informa-  
tion about the relationship  
between the resolution and  
the scanning area, see  
TWAIN driver Help.  
C Click [Close].  
Note  
❒ When an original placed in  
the ADF is previewed, place  
that original again.  
www.cnet.ie  
121  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using the Network TWAIN Scanner Function  
Functions of the TWAIN Driver  
The following is an introduction to  
the various functions of the TWAIN  
driver:  
Reference  
For more information about these  
functions or other functions, see  
TWAIN driver Help.  
❖ Automatic Tilt Correction  
This function automatically cor-  
rects character strings that were  
scanned slanted.  
❖ Printing to the Image  
This function allows you to im-  
print dates, page numbers, or your  
favorite characters on a scan file.  
You can also change the fonts of  
the imprints as well as change the  
ascending order of images to a de-  
scending order.s  
5
❖ Scanning Mode Registration  
This function allows you to regis-  
ter other scanning configurations  
that are often used as scanning  
modes besides the already pre-in-  
stalled ones. After registration,  
you can quickly scan with these  
scanning configurations.  
www.cnet.ie  
122  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
6. Sending Scan File by E-mail  
This chapter explains how to send a scan file as an e-mail attachment.  
Procedure Breakdown  
The following overview diagram shows the flow of the steps for sending scan  
files as E-mail attachments. Note that the underlined steps are essential.  
⇒ p.126 “Before Sending Scan  
Data”  
Place originals in the ADF or on the exposure glass.  
⇒ p.128 “Selecting Destina-  
tions”  
Select a destination.  
⇒ p.130 “Selecting Cc Destina-  
Select a [Cc] destination.  
tions”  
Select a subject.  
Make scan settings.  
Select a sender.  
⇒ p.130 “Selecting a Subject”  
⇒ p.132 “Making Scan Settings”  
⇒ p.134 “Selecting a Sender”  
⇒ p.135 “Starting a Scan Opera-  
tion”  
Press the {Start} key.  
Confirm the transmission results by using the Web Sta- ⇒ p.137 “Checking Transmis-  
tus Monitor. sion Results”  
www.cnet.ie  
123  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Sending Scan File by E-mail  
E-mail Content  
Sender  
File name and file type of an e-mail  
attachment  
• If you specify a sender of an e-mail  
using the [Sender] list on this ma-  
chine, the user you have specified  
becomes the sender.  
A scanned image file to be sent as an  
E-mail attachment is automatically  
named as “SDOC0001.xxx” (“xxx” is  
a file extension). The four-digit  
number in the file name is count up  
sequentially, when you perform scan-  
ning of multiple pages, with the [File  
Type] setting is set to “ Single Page ”.  
Note  
❒ It is necessary to set [Register as  
Sender] to “ On ” to have a regis-  
tered user displayed on this ma-  
chine’s [Sender] list. The setup  
item [Register as Sender] is in-  
cluded under [Configuration] →  
[E-mail SettingsE-mail Address] →  
[E-mail Address] on the Web Sta-  
tus Monitor.  
Note  
❒ Scanned image files are sent in the  
file format that you specified in  
[File Type] under [Scan Settings]. See  
p.73 “File Type”.  
• If you do not specify a sender of an  
e-mail when [Sender's Name Default]  
is set to “ Administrator's Address  
”, the registered administrator’s  
address becomes the sender.  
6
Related information  
The following information is auto-  
matically generated and used as body  
text of your E-mail message.  
The setup item [Sender's Name De-  
fault] is included under [Configura-  
tion] → [E-mail Settings] on the Web  
Status Monitor.  
Note  
❒ You cannot change the auto-gener-  
ated body text.  
Note  
❖ First line  
❒ It is essential to specify a sender  
of an e-mail, when [Sender's  
Name Default] is set to “ No ”.  
The following sentence is inserted  
to the first line of an e-mail body.  
“This E-mail was sent from <de-  
vice name> (model name).”  
Subject  
Note  
You can select a subject of an E-mail  
from the [Subject] list displayed on  
this machine.  
❒ For “<device name>”, the name  
that is specified for the ma-  
chine’s device name is used.  
(You can specify the device  
name using [Configuration] →  
[Basic Settings] → [General Set-  
tings] → [Device Name].)  
❒ For “model name”, the product  
ID of this machine is automati-  
cally inserted.  
Note  
❒ No subject appears on your E-mail  
message when you do not specify a  
subject. (Depending on the E-mail  
client software on the side of the  
receiver, such string like “No sub-  
ject” appears as the subject.)  
www.cnet.ie  
124  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Procedure Breakdown  
❖ Date and time when scan is performed  
Date and time information is in-  
serted to the second line of an e-  
mail body, in the following format.  
“Day/Month/Year/Hour/Minut  
e/Second/Offset from GMT”  
Note  
❒ You can set time and date using  
[Date/Time(Year/Month/Day/Hr/Min/  
Sec)] in [2.Send Scan Settings] un-  
der the Scanner Features menu.  
❒ “Offset from GMT” shows the  
time offset from Greenwich  
Mean Time. You can specify this  
setting by using [Configuration]  
→ [Basic Settings] → [Scanner] →  
[Time Zone] on the Web Status  
Monitor.  
❖ Contact information  
6
When [Sender's Name Default] (in-  
cluded under [Configuration] → [E-  
mail Settings] on the Web Status  
Monitor) is set to “ Administrator's  
Address ”, the registered adminis-  
trator’s e-mail address is inserted  
to the third line of an e-mail body,  
as a contact representative.  
When [Sender's Name Default] is set  
to “ No ” and administrator’s ad-  
dress is not registered, the contact  
information is omitted.  
www.cnet.ie  
125  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sending Scan File by E-mail  
Before Sending Scan Data  
Reference  
E-mail/Send File standby  
screen  
See p.109 “Setting Originals” for  
information about how to place the  
originals in the ADF (Auto Docu-  
ment Feeder) or on the exposure  
glass, and about available paper  
size and weight.  
Before performing a Send Scan opera-  
tion, make sure that the E-mail/Send  
File standby screen is displayed on  
the machine’s display panel.  
The E-mail/Send File standby screen  
is displayed as the Send Scan initial  
screen when [7.Select Method] (in  
[2.Send Scan Settings] under the Scan-  
ner Features menu) is set to “ Send  
File/TWAIN ”, while the Delivery  
Server standby screen is displayed  
when [7.Select Method] is set to “ Deliv-  
ery Server/TWAIN ”.  
Original Location  
When you perform a Send Scan (e-  
mail, Send File (SMB/FTP) or Deliv-  
ery Server) operation, it is not neces-  
sary to select the location (ADF or  
exposure glass) for scanning.  
This machine automatically detects  
the originals placed in the ADF or on  
the exposure glass, and scan is per-  
formed. Note, however, that the orig-  
inals in the ADF are scanned when  
the originals are set to on both of the  
ADF and the exposure glass.  
• When the message “ Ready ” and  
the number of copies are displayed  
on the first line of the display pan-  
el, the machine is standing by for  
Print Scan. Press [PrevMenu] to re-  
turn to the Select Method screen.  
6
Original Orientation and  
Scanning Sides  
When you perform a Send Scan (e-  
mail, Send File (SMB/FTP) or Deliv-  
ery Server) operation, you can specify  
the original orientation and scanning  
sides manually, by pressing [Scan] on  
the E-mail/Send File standby screen,  
and then selecting [Manual]. Instead of  
manually specifying these settings,  
you can also use the settings you have  
registered to “Default”, “ User 1”, “  
User 2”, or “ User 3”. See p.132 “Mak-  
ing Scan Settings” for details.  
• When the message “ Connecting  
with PC... ” is displayed on the  
display panel, the machine is used  
from a client computer, and scan-  
ning is in progress. Wait until the  
job now in progress ends.  
www.cnet.ie  
126  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Before Sending Scan Data  
• When the message “ Connecting  
with PC... Set original(s)  
and select the settings from  
the PC.” is displayed on the dis-  
play panel, the machine is stand-  
ing by for the network TWAIN.  
Press [Exit].  
If there are no [Exit], the Network  
TWAIN exclusive standby screen is  
displayed. Set [7.Select Method] (in  
[2.Send Scan Settings] under the Scan-  
ner Features menu) to “ Send  
File/TWAIN ”, and then restart the  
machine.  
6
• When a send file path name is dis-  
played at the second line of the  
screen, the standby screen for [En-  
ter Custom Send File] is displayed. In  
this case, press [PrevMenu].  
www.cnet.ie  
127  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sending Scan File by E-mail  
Selecting Destinations and a Subject  
You can specify up to 100 destina-  
C While [To:] is highlighted, press  
tions at a time, by selecting from the  
registered destinations on this ma-  
chine. You can also specify Cc desti-  
nations and a subject of an e-mail.  
[Settings].  
Selecting Destinations  
Note  
❒ If [To:] is not highlighted, use  
the {1} and {0} keys to select  
it.  
A Press the {1} key.  
The list of the destinations that are  
registered to this machine appears.  
D Use [Next] and [Prev.] to scroll  
through the pages, and display  
the destination you want to select.  
Note  
❒ You can skip this step when the  
E-mail/Send File standby  
screen is displayed.  
6
The E-mail/Send File standby  
screen is displayed.  
B Press [Dest.].  
E Use the {1} and {0} keys to  
highlight the destination you  
want to select, and then press [Se-  
lect]  
This selects the check box next to  
the destination.  
Note  
❒ If “ On ” is selected for [Auto Up-  
date Destination List] in [2.Send  
Scan Settings] under the Scanner  
Features menu on this machine,  
the destination list is automati-  
cally updated when you press  
[Dest.]. See p.61 “Auto Update  
Destination List” for details.  
F Repeat steps and for selecting  
D
E
each of the additional destina-  
tions.  
Note  
❒ While highlighting a destina-  
tion with its check box selected,  
press [Clear] to clear the check  
box (this deselects the destina-  
tion).  
www.cnet.ie  
128  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
                 
Selecting Destinations and a Subject  
❒ If you want to select from an-  
other title, press the {./*} (Ti-  
tle) key. This displays list of  
titles again.  
To recall destinations using a title  
A Press the {./*} (Title) key.  
List of titles appears on the  
screen.  
To recall all available  
destinations  
Note  
❒ Titles are displayed accord-  
ing to the settings in [Configu-  
ration] → [Basic Settings] →  
[Scanner] → [Select Title] on  
the Web Status Monitor.  
A Press the {./*} (Title) key.  
List of titles appears on the  
screen.  
B Use the {1} or {0} key to  
highlight [All], and then press  
[OK].  
B Use the {1} or {0} key to  
highlight the title you want to  
select, and then press [OK].  
G When you are finished, press [Ex-  
it].  
The destinations assigned to the  
selected title are displayed.  
6
This returns to the screen that was  
Note  
displayed in step .  
C
❒ You can select the title under  
which each of the registered  
destinations is assigned in  
[Configuration] → [E-mail Set-  
tings] → [E-mail Address] →  
[Assign Title] on the Web Sta-  
tus Monitor.  
Note  
❒ When no cc destination and  
subject is necessary, press [OK]  
here. The E-mail/Send File  
standby screen is displayed,  
and the first destination you  
have selected appears at the sec-  
ond line of the screen. When  
you have selected multiple des-  
tinations, you can confirm them  
by using the {1} and {0}  
keys.  
C Highlight the destination you  
want to select, and then press  
[Select].  
Note  
❒ While highlighting a destina-  
tion with its check box select-  
ed, press [Clear] to clear the  
check box (this deselects the  
destination).  
www.cnet.ie  
129  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Sending Scan File by E-mail  
Selecting Cc Destinations  
Selecting a Subject  
You can specify destinations to send  
“carbon copies” of an E-mail message  
as necessary. Up to 100 destinations  
can be selected per an E-mail message  
in all, including those specified as  
[To:] and [Cc:].  
A Use the {1} and {0} keys to  
highlight [Subject], and then press  
[Settings].  
A Use the {1} and {0} keys to  
highlight [Cc:], and then press  
[Settings].  
The list of the subjects that are reg-  
istered to this machine appears.  
B Use [Next] and [Prev.] to scroll  
through the pages, and display  
the subject you want to select.  
The list of the destinations that are  
registered to this machine appears.  
B Follow the same procedure as  
6
step through under “Selecting  
D
F
C Use the {1} and {0} keys to  
highlight the subject you want to  
select, and then press [Select].  
Destinations”.  
C When you are finished, press [Ex-  
it].  
This selects the check box next to  
the subject.  
This returns to the screen that was  
displayed in step .  
A
Note  
Note  
❒ Selecting another subject auto-  
matically deselects the subject  
currently selected (so the check  
mark next to the subject is  
cleared).  
❒ When no subject is necessary,  
press [OK] here. The E-mail/  
Send File standby screen is dis-  
played.  
❒ The second line of the screen  
shows the first destination that  
you have specified for [To:] in  
“Selecting Destinations”. You  
can confirm all the specified  
destinations by using the {1}  
and {0} keys, when you have  
selected multiple destinations.  
❒ While highlighting a subject  
with its check box selected,  
press [Clear] to clear the check  
box (this deselects the subject).  
D Press [Exit].  
This returns to the screen that was  
displayed in step .  
A
❒ You cannot confirm the “ Cc ”  
destinations on the E-mail/  
Send File standby screen.  
www.cnet.ie  
130  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
               
Selecting Destinations and a Subject  
E Press [OK].  
This returns to the E-mail/Send  
File standby screen.  
Note  
❒ The second line of the screen  
shows the first destination that  
you have specified for [To:] in  
“Selecting Destinations”. You  
can confirm all the specified  
destinations by using the {1}  
and {0} keys, when you have  
selected multiple destinations.  
❒ You cannot confirm the subject  
or the “ Cc ” destination on the  
E-mail/Send File standby  
screen.  
6
www.cnet.ie  
131  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sending Scan File by E-mail  
Making Scan Settings  
Follow the steps below to configure  
scan settings before you perform a  
Send Scan operation. If you skip the  
following steps, scan is performed us-  
ing the settings that you have config-  
ured and registered to [Default] in  
[4.Scan Settings] under the Scanner  
Features menu.  
To recall a registered scan  
settings  
A Use the {1} or {0} key to  
highlight [User 1], [User 2] or  
[User 3] on the screen, and then  
press [OK].  
This returns to the E-mail/Send  
File standby screen, and the cor-  
responding scan settings are  
displayed on the third line of  
the screen.  
A Press [Scan].  
To configure scan settings  
manually  
The Scan Settings screen is dis-  
played.  
A Use the {1} or {0} key to  
highlight [Manual] on the  
screen, and then press [Set-  
tings].  
B Select whether you configure the  
scan settings manually, or use one  
of the user settings you have reg-  
istered.  
6
The first page of the Scan Set-  
tings screen ( Scan Settings 1/3)  
is displayed.  
B Use [Next] or [Prev.] to scroll  
through the pages, use the {1}  
or {0} key to highlight the set-  
up item you want to change,  
and then press [Settings].  
Reference  
You can confirm the scan set-  
tings you have registered. See  
p.133 “Confirming the Scan Set-  
tings”.  
Note  
❒ Press [Cancel] if you want to use  
the settings you have registered  
to [Default].  
Reference  
See p.70 “Information to Reg-  
ister in [Send Scan Set-  
tings]” for details about each  
of the setup items.  
❒ You cannot edit and save the  
settings that you have regis-  
tered to [User 1], [User 2] and [Us-  
er 3] here. If you want to use one  
of the user settings while chang-  
ing some of them, recall the user  
setting you want to use by high-  
lighting it and pressing [OK]  
first. And then, change the set-  
www.cnet.ie  
tings by selecting [Manual].  
132  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Making Scan Settings  
C Highlight the option you want  
to select by using the {1} or  
{0} key, and then press [OK].  
A Press [Scan].  
The Scan Settings screen is dis-  
played.  
Note  
B Use the {1} or {0} key to high-  
light [Manual], [User 1], [User 2] or  
[User 3] on the screen, and then  
press [OK].  
❒ Pressing [Cancel] discards the  
selected option, and returns  
to the previous screen.  
❒ When you select “ Custom  
Resolution ” for [Resolution]  
and/or “Custom Area Set-  
ting” for [Scan Size], use the  
number keys to specify the  
values.  
The status screen appears.  
D Repeat steps B and C as nec-  
C Use [Next] and [Prev.] to display  
the setting of the setup item you  
want to confirm.  
essary.  
6
E When you are finished, press  
[PrevMenu].  
This returns to the Scan Settings  
screen.  
F Press [OK].  
This returns to the E-mail/Send  
File standby screen, and the cur-  
rent scan settings are displayed  
on the third line of the screen.  
D When you are finished, press [Ex-  
it].  
E Press [Cancel] or [OK].  
Note  
Confirming the Scan Settings  
❒ If you want to apply the scan  
settings you selected in step  
,
B
You can confirm the current scan set-  
tings, or the scan settings that you  
have registered to [Default], [User 1],  
[User 2] or [User 3].  
press [OK]. If you want to exit  
the status screen without chang-  
ing anything, press [Cancel].  
This returns to the E-mail/Send  
File standby screen.  
Note  
❒ You can confirm the [Default] set-  
tings by selecting [Manual] in step B  
below, unless you configure the  
scan settings manually. After you  
have manually configured the scan  
settings, selecting [Manual] displays  
the current settings.  
www.cnet.ie  
133  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Sending Scan File by E-mail  
Selecting a Sender  
You can select a sender of an e-mail  
using the [Sender] list on this machine.  
The [Sender] list displays the regis-  
tered users, whose [Register as Sender]  
settings (included under [Configura-  
tion] → [E-mail Settings] → [E-mail Ad-  
dress] on the Web Status Monitor) are  
set to “On”.  
❒ When you select a user whose  
[Sender's Password] setting (in-  
cluded under [Configuration] →  
[E-mail Settings] → [E-mail Ad-  
dress] on the Web Status Moni-  
tor) is set to “ On ”, a dialog box  
for entering a password ap-  
pears. Enter the registered pass-  
word using the number keys.  
A Press [Sender].  
❒ You can recall specific senders  
by selecting a title.See p.129 “To  
recall destinations using a title”.  
C Press [OK].  
This returns to the E-mail standby  
screen.  
The list of the senders that are reg-  
istered to this machine appears.  
B Use [Next] and [Prev.] to scroll  
through the pages, use the {1}  
and {0} keys to highlight the  
sender you want to select, and  
then press [Select].  
6
This selects the check box next to  
the sender’s name.  
Note  
❒ Selecting another sender auto-  
matically deselects the sender  
currently selected (so the check  
mark next to the sender’s name  
is cleared).  
❒ While highlighting a sender  
with its check box selected,  
press [Clear] to clear the check  
box (this deselects the sender).  
www.cnet.ie  
134  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Performing Scan Operation  
Performing Scan Operation  
• Press [New Job] to finish the  
current scanning job and  
send the scanned data. You  
can start a new job with the  
current settings after the  
scanned data is sent.  
Starting a Scan Operation  
To start with originals in the ADF  
A Confirm that the E-mail standby  
• Press [OK] to finish the cur-  
rent scanning job, send the  
scanned data, and then re-  
turn to the initial screen  
when the power is turned on.  
If you do not press any key,  
this machine acts as [OK] is  
pressed, after the specified  
period.  
screen is displayed.  
When “ Select destination(s).  
” is displayed, no destination is se-  
lected. Select a destination to dis-  
play “ Ready” on the screen.  
When scanning finishes properly,  
the e-mail is sent to the e-mail  
(SMTP) server. m appears at the  
upper right corner of the screen  
while the e-mail is sent.  
B Press the {Start} key.  
6
ABK007S  
Scanning originals in the ADF  
starts.  
Note  
❒ You cannot perform any opera-  
tions while m is displayed on  
the screen.  
Note  
❒ To interrupt scanning, press the  
{Clear/Stop} key.  
❒ Do not turn the power of this  
machine off while m is dis-  
played on the screen.  
❒ When “ Show Options after  
Each Scan Job” is selected for  
[End of Scan Option] under  
[2.Send Scan Settings], a screen  
for selecting the next operation  
appears after scanning of all the  
originals in the ADF is complet-  
ed.  
m disappears when the e-mail has  
been sent to the e-mail (SMTP)  
server, and the E-mail standby  
screen appears.  
• Press [Add] to continue scan-  
ning to add scanned data to  
the current image file.  
www.cnet.ie  
135  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
             
Sending Scan File by E-mail  
D Repeat step as necessary.  
C
To start with an original on the exposure  
glass  
E Press [Finish] when all the origi-  
nals are scanned.  
A Confirm that the E-mail standby  
Note  
screen is displayed.  
❒ When “Show Options after  
Each Scan Job” is selected for  
[End of Scan Option] under  
[2.Send Scan Settings], a screen  
for selecting the next operation  
appears after you press [Finish].  
When “ Select destination(s).  
” is displayed, no destination is se-  
lected. Select a destination to dis-  
play “ Ready” on the screen.  
When scanning finishes properly,  
the e-mail is sent to the e-mail  
(SMTP) server. m appears at the  
upper right corner of the screen  
while the e-mail is sent.  
B Press the {Start} key.  
6
ABK007S  
Note  
Scanning the original on the expo-  
sure glass starts.  
❒ You cannot perform any opera-  
tions while m is displayed on  
the screen.  
Note  
❒ Do not turn the power of this  
machine off while m is dis-  
played on the screen.  
❒ To interrupt scanning, press the  
{Clear/Stop} key.  
After the original is scanned properly,  
the message “ Set the next origi-  
nal(s) and press the Start key,  
or press [Finish] to complete.  
” appears.  
m disappears when the e-mail has  
been sent to the e-mail (SMTP)  
server, and the E-mail standby  
screen appears.  
C Place the next original on the ex-  
posure glass, and then press the  
{Start} key.  
www.cnet.ie  
136  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Performing Scan Operation  
Checking Transmission Results  
Follow the steps below to check transmission results using the Web Status Mon-  
itor on a client computer.  
A Start a Web browser, and then enter this machine's IP address in the ad-  
dress bar.  
Reference  
See p.85 “To access this machine from a web browser”  
Note  
❒ You can confirm the IP address of this machine by selecting [IP Address] in  
[1.System Settings] under the Scanner Features menu.  
The top Page of the Web Status Monitor appears.  
B On the main menu, click [Admin Info.].  
C On the sub-menu, click [Send Info.].  
D Check the transmission result.  
Note  
6
❒ Up to 20 transmission results are displayed in the [Send Info.] list at a time.  
Each time you perform a Send Scan operation, the list is updated and only  
the latest 20 transmission results are displayed.  
❒ The transmission results are cleared when the power of this machine is  
turned off.  
❒ In the [Status] column, [Standby], [Sending], [Complete], or [Not Sent] is dis-  
played.  
❒ If an e-mail or a file could not be sent for any reason, [Not Sent] appears in  
the [Status] column.  
❒ The [Send Type] column indicates the type of transmission: [E-mail], [SMB],  
[FTP], [Delivery] or [Print Scan].  
❒ The number of original pages that are scanned appears in the [Pages] col-  
umn.  
www.cnet.ie  
137  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Sending Scan File by E-mail  
6
www.cnet.ie  
138  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
7. Sending Scan File by Scan  
to Folder  
This chapter explains how to send a scan file to a Windows shared folder. In this  
chapter, the following two types of Scan to Folder procedures are explained sep-  
arately:  
• Procedures to send a scanned file to a registered shared folder.  
• Procedures to send a scanned file to a shared folder that is not registered to  
this machine. This function is called “Enter Custom Send File”.  
Sending a Scanned File to a Registered  
Shared Folder  
By using the control panel of this machine, you can send a scanned file to a Win-  
dows shared folder that is registered to this machine.  
Procedure Breakdown  
The following overview diagram shows the flow of the steps for sending a  
scanned file to a Windows shared folder that is registered to this machine. Note  
that the underlined steps are essential.  
Note  
❒ Some of the steps such as making scan settings are identical to those ex-  
plained under “Sending Scan Files by E-mail”. See the relevant pages shown  
to the right of the following overview diagram.  
⇒ p.126 “Before Sending Scan  
Data”  
Place originals in the ADF or on the exposure glass.  
⇒ p.140 “Selecting a Shared  
Folder”  
Select a distination folder.  
⇒ p.142 “Selecting a File  
Name”  
Select a file name.  
⇒ p.132 “Making Scan Set-  
tings”  
Make scan settings.  
⇒ p.135 “Performing Scan Op-  
eration”  
Press the {Start} key.  
www.cnet.ie  
139  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Sending Scan File by Scan to Folder  
Confirm the transmission results by using the Web Sta- ⇒ p.137 “Checking Transmis-  
tus Monitor.  
sion Results”  
C Press the {1} or {0} key to high-  
light [SMB], and then press [Set-  
tings].  
Selecting a Shared Folder  
You can select a single shared folder  
as a destination to which you send a  
scanned file. Follow the steps below  
to select a shared folder.  
A Press the {1} key.  
The list of the shared folders that  
are registered to this machine ap-  
pears.  
D Use [Next] and [Prev.] to scroll  
through the pages, and display  
the shared folder name you want  
to select.  
Note  
❒ You can skip this step when the  
E-mail/Send File standby  
screen is displayed.  
The E-mail/Send File standby  
screen is displayed.  
7
B Press [Dest.].  
E Use the {1} and {0} keys to  
highlight the shared folder name  
you want to select, and then press  
[Select].  
This selects the check box next to  
the shared folder name.  
Note  
Note  
❒ If “ On ” is selected for [Auto Up-  
date Destination List] in [2.Send  
Scan Settings] under the Scanner  
Features menu on this machine,  
the destination list is automati-  
cally updated when you press  
[Dest.]. See p.61 “Auto Update  
Destination List” for details.  
❒ Because you can select only one  
shared folder, selecting another  
folder automatically deselects  
the folder currently selected (so  
the check mark next to the fold-  
er name is cleared).  
www.cnet.ie  
140  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Sending a Scanned File to a Registered Shared Folder  
To recall shared folders using a  
title  
To recall all available  
destinations  
A Press the {./*} (Title) key.  
A Press the {./*} (Title) key.  
List of titles appears on the  
screen.  
List of titles appears on the  
screen.  
B Use the {1} or {0} key to  
highlight [All], and then press  
[OK].  
Note  
❒ Titles are displayed accord-  
ing to the settings in [Configu-  
ration] → [Basic Settings] →  
[Scanner] → [Select Title] on  
the Web Status Monitor.  
B Use the {1} or {0} key to  
highlight the title you want to  
select, and then press [OK].  
F Press [Exit].  
The message “ Enter protection  
code for destination.” appears.  
G Enter the protection code using  
the number keys.  
The shared folders assigned to  
the selected title are displayed.  
7
Note  
❒ You can select the title under  
which each of the registered  
destinations is assigned in  
[Configuration] → [File Send  
Settings] → [File Send Path] →  
[Assign Title] on the Web Sta-  
tus Monitor.  
Note  
❒ Enter the four- through eight-  
digit number that is specified in  
[Configuration] → [File Send Set-  
tings] → [File Send Path] → [Pro-  
tected Password] on the Web  
Status Monitor.  
C Highlight the shared folder  
name you want to select, and  
then press [Select].  
H Press [OK].  
This returns to the screen that was  
This selects the check box next  
to the folder name.  
displayed in step .  
C
www.cnet.ie  
141  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sending Scan File by Scan to Folder  
Note  
D Use the {1} and {0} keys to  
highlight the file name youwant  
to select, and then press [Select].  
❒ When you do not specify a file  
name, press [OK] here. The E-  
mail/Send File standby screen  
is displayed, and the shared  
folder name that you have se-  
lected appears at the second line  
of the screen.  
This selects the check box next to  
the file name.  
Note  
❒ Selecting another file name au-  
tomatically deselects the file  
name currently selected (so the  
check mark next to the file name  
is cleared).  
Selecting a File Name  
You can specify a file name (actually a  
prefix string for a file name) for the  
scanned file to be sent to the shared  
folder. When you do not specify a file  
name, the default file name “DOC” is  
used automatically.  
❒ While highlighting a file name  
with its check box selected,  
press [Clear] to clear the check  
box (this deselects the file  
name).  
E Press [Exit].  
A While the E-mail/Send File stand-  
by screen is displayed, press  
[Dest.].  
This returns to the screen that was  
displayed in step .  
B
The screen for selecting destina-  
tions appears.  
F Press [OK].  
This returns to the E-mail/Send  
File standby screen.  
7
Note  
❒ If this screen is already dis-  
played, you can skip this step.  
B Use the {1} and {0} keys to  
highlight [File Name], and then  
press [Settings].  
The list of the file names that are  
registered to this machine appears.  
C Use [Next] and [Prev.] to scroll  
through the pages, and display  
the file name you want to select.  
www.cnet.ie  
142  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Using [Enter Custom Send File] to Send a Scanned File to an Unregistered Shared Folder  
Using [Enter Custom Send File] to Send a  
Scanned File to an Unregistered Shared  
Folder  
By using the [Enter Custom Send File] function on the Web Status Monitor, you can  
send a scanned file to any of Windows shared folders that you have an access  
right.  
Procedure Breakdown  
The following overview diagram shows the flow of the steps for sending a  
scanned file to a Windows shared folder using the Web Status Monitor. Note  
that the underlined steps are essential.  
Note  
❒ Some of the steps such as making scan settings are identical to those ex-  
plained under “Sending Scan Files by E-mail”. See the relevant pages shown  
to the right of the following overview diagram.  
Display the Web Status Monitor on a web browser.  
⇒ p.85 “To access this  
machine from a web  
browser”  
7
⇒ p.144 “Using the  
Enter Custom Send  
File Function”  
Display the [Enter Custom Send File] page and make neces-  
sary settings.  
⇒ p.126 “Before Send-  
ing Scan Data”  
Place originals in the ADF or on the exposure glass.  
⇒ p.135 “Performing  
Scan Operation”  
Press the {Start} key.  
Confirm the transmission results by using the Web Status ⇒ p.137 “Checking  
Monitor. TransmissionResults”  
www.cnet.ie  
143  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Sending Scan File by Scan to Folder  
Using the Enter Custom Send File Function  
Follow the steps below to send a scanned file to a Windows shared folder using  
the [Enter Custom Send File] function.  
A Start a Web browser on a client computer, and then enter the IP address of  
this machine in the address bar.  
Reference  
See p.85 “To access this machine from a web browser”  
Note  
❒ You can confirm the IP address of this machine by selecting [IP Address] in  
[1.System Settings] under the Scanner Features menu.  
The top page of the Web Status Monitor appears.  
B On the main menu, click [Enter Custom Send File].  
The [Enter Custom Send File] page appears.  
C Make the necessary settings on the screen.  
Reference  
See p.70 “Information to Register in [Send Scan Settings]” for information  
about the setup items at the top through middle of the [Enter Custom Send  
File] page ( “Scan Type” through “File Type” ).  
7
See p.112 “Original Orientation” for information about [Original Setting/Ori-  
entation].  
See below for information about the settings included under [File Send]  
group.  
❖ File Send Path  
Enter the path to the shared folder where you are sending the file, in the  
format of "\\host name\folder name" or "\\IP address\folder name".  
You can also specify a shared folder that is not specified on the [Configura-  
tion: File Send Path] page.  
Note  
❒ The specified IP address is effective only for the computer running Win-  
dows 2000/XP or Windows NT as operating system. An IP address can-  
not be specified for a host running Windows 98/Me as operating  
system.  
❖ Login User Name  
Enter a user name with shared folder access, in the format of "work group  
name\user name" or "domain name\user name".  
Note  
❒ If the shared folder is on the FTP server, enter a user name with FTP  
www.cnet.ie  
server access.  
144  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Using [Enter Custom Send File] to Send a Scanned File to an Unregistered Shared Folder  
❖ Login Password  
Enter the password for the user displayed in the [ Login User Name ] box.  
Each password character appears as "*".  
Note  
❒ When accessing a shared folder that is password protected under Win-  
dows 95/98/98 SE/Me, enter the password.  
❖ [Test]  
Click to check whether connection to the specified shared folder is enabled  
when data is entered in the [File Send Path], [Login User Name], and [Login  
Password] boxes.  
❖ File Name  
Enter the name of the file to store, using up to 20 characters.  
D When everything is the way you want, click [OK].  
The message “Custom Send File has been set. To reconfigure, click Enter Cus-  
tom Send File” appears on the computer, and the settings you made are sent  
to this machine.  
At this time, this machine stands by for scanning, and “ Ready” message ap-  
pears on the display panel of this machine.  
7
E Place originals.  
F Press the {Start} key.  
ABK007S  
Scanning starts.  
Note  
❒ To interrupt scanning, press the {Clear/Stop} key.  
www.cnet.ie  
145  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sending Scan File by Scan to Folder  
Reference  
When you place the original on the exposure glass, see p.136 “To start with  
an original on the exposure glass”.  
When scanning finishes properly, the file is sent to the shared folder. m ap-  
pears at the upper right of the screen while the file is sent.  
Note  
❒ You cannot perform operations on this machine while m is displayed.  
G Press [PrevMenu].  
The display of this machine returns to the standby screen that had been dis-  
played before you started the [Enter Custom Send File] operation.  
Note  
❒ Be sure to press [OK] to go back to a standby screen on this machine before  
performing another [Enter Custom Send File] operation. If you start another  
[Enter Custom Send File] operation without displaying a standby screen on  
the machine, the message “ Unable to make configurations because  
Scanner is currently in use. Please try again later.” appears  
on the Web Status Monitor.  
7
www.cnet.ie  
146  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Scanned Image Files Sent to Shared Folders  
Scanned Image Files Sent to Shared  
Folders  
This section describes how the file  
name and the file location of a  
scanned file are determined when  
you perform a Scan to Folder opera-  
tion.  
Note  
❒ It is essential to specify a file name  
when you use the [Enter Custom  
Send File] function.  
❖ File names with time  
When [File Name + Time] (included  
under [Configuration] → [File Send  
Settings] → [File Send] on the Web  
Status Monitor) is set to “ On ”, file  
names are generated in the follow-  
ing manner.  
“Specified file name/Year/Month  
/Day/Hour/Minute/ Second/(4-  
digit sequential number)”  
File Locations  
A scanned file created by a Scan to  
Folder operation is sent to a shared  
folder that you specified, and is saved  
in a sub-folder inside of the specified  
folder. The sub-folder name is identi-  
cal to the device name of this ma-  
chine.  
• Example 2:  
• Example 1:  
Specified file name: image  
File format: single page  
Pages: black white, text  
Original page count: 2, two-sid-  
ed  
Time when scanned: 2003/9/16  
/13:07:21  
Specified folder: \\computer-  
name\folder  
Device name of this machine:  
RNP6219DA  
File location:  
\\computername\folder\  
RNP6219DA  
7
The following files are generat-  
ed:  
Note  
image030916130721(0001).TIF  
image030916130721(0002).TIF  
image030916130721(0003).TIF  
image030916130721(0004).TIF  
❒ You can specify the device  
name of this machine using  
[Configuration] → [Basic Settings]  
→ [General Settings] → [Device  
Name].  
• Example 3:  
Specified file name: (none)  
File format: multi-page TIFF  
Original type: colour, full col-  
our  
Pages: 2, two-sided  
Time when scanned: 2003/9/16  
/13:07:21  
The following files are generat-  
ed:  
DOC030916130721(0001).PDF  
File Names  
Files created by a Scan to Folder oper-  
ation are named as described below  
in accordance with the file name you  
specified.  
In case you did not specify a file  
name, the default file name “DOC”  
applies.  
www.cnet.ie  
147  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Sending Scan File by Scan to Folder  
❖ File names without time  
Note  
When [File Name + Time] (included  
under [Configuration] → [File Send  
Settings] → [File Send] on the Web  
Status Monitor) is set to “ Off ”, file  
names are generated in the follow-  
ing manner.  
❒ All the files created in the exam-  
ples 2 to 5 are saved to the same  
folder, which is explained in the  
example 1.  
❒ When you send scan files to the  
shared folder that you have al-  
ready sent scan files before, be sure  
to assign a different file name if  
[File Name + Time] is set to “ Off ”. If  
you specify the same file name and  
file type that you specified in the  
previous Send File operation, the  
previous scan files are overwritten  
with new ones.  
“Specified file name/(4-digit se-  
quential number)”  
• Example 4:  
Specified file name: image  
File format: single page  
Original type: black white, text  
Pages: 2, two-sided  
Time when scanned: 2003/9/16  
/13:07:21  
The following files are generat-  
ed:  
image(0001).TIF  
image(0002).TIF  
image(0003).TIF  
image(0004).TIF  
• Example 5:  
Specified file name: (none)  
File format: multi-page TIFF  
Original type: colour, full col-  
our  
7
Original page count: 2, two-sid-  
ed  
Time when scanned: 2003/9/16  
/13:07:21  
The following files are generat-  
ed:  
DOC(0001).PDF  
Reference  
For details about file formats and  
extensions, see p.73 “File Type”.  
www.cnet.ie  
148  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
8. Sending Scan File by Scan  
to FTP  
This chapter explains procedures to send a scanned file to an FTP server.  
Procedure Breakdown  
The following overview diagram shows the flow of the steps for sending a  
scanned file to an FTP server that is registered to this machine. Note that the un-  
derlined steps are essential.  
Note  
❒ Some of the steps such as making scan settings are identical to those ex-  
plained under “Sending Scan Files by E-mail”. See the relevant pages shown  
to the right of the following overview diagram.  
⇒ p.126 “Before Sending  
Place originals in the ADF or on the exposure glass.  
Scan Data”  
⇒ p.150 “Selecting an FTP  
Server”  
Select an FTP server.  
⇒ p.142 “Selecting a File  
Name”  
Select a file name.  
⇒ p.132 “Making Scan  
Settings”  
Make scan settings.  
⇒ p.135 “Performing Scan  
Press the {Start} key.  
Operation”  
Confirm the transmission results by using the Web Sta- ⇒ p.137 “Checking Trans-  
tus Monitor.  
mission Results”  
www.cnet.ie  
149  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Sending Scan File by Scan to FTP  
Selecting an FTP Server  
You can select a single FTP server as a  
destination to which you send a  
scanned file. Follow the steps below  
to select an FTP server.  
D Use [Next] and [Prev.] to scroll  
through the pages, and display  
the FTP server name you want to  
select.  
A Press the {1} key.  
E Use the {1} and {0} keys to  
highlight the FTP server name  
you want to select, and then press  
[Select].  
Note  
❒ You can skip this step when the  
E-mail/Send File standby  
screen is displayed.  
This selects the check box next to  
the FTP server name.  
The E-mail/Send File standby  
screen is displayed.  
Note  
❒ Because you can select only one  
FTP server, selecting another  
FTP server automatically dese-  
lects the FTP server currently  
selected (so the check mark next  
to the FTP server name is  
cleared).  
B Press [Dest.].  
Note  
8
❒ If “ On ” is selected for [Auto Up-  
date Destination List] in [2.Send  
Scan Settings] under the Scanner  
Features menu on this machine,  
the destination list is automati-  
cally updated when you press  
[Dest.]. See p.61 “Auto Update  
Destination List” for details.  
To recall FTP servers using a title  
A Press the {./*} (Title) key.  
List of titles appears on the  
screen.  
Note  
❒ Titles are displayed accord-  
ing to the settings in [Configu-  
ration] → [Basic Settings] →  
[Scanner] → [Select Title] on  
the Web Status Monitor.  
C Press the {1} or {0} key to high-  
light [FTP], and then press [Set-  
tings].  
The list of the FTP servers that are  
registered to this machine appears.  
www.cnet.ie  
150  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Selecting an FTP Server  
B Use the {1} or {0} key to  
highlight the title you want to  
select, and then psress [OK].  
G Enter the protection code using  
the number keys.  
Note  
The FTP servers assigned to the  
selected title are displayed.  
❒ Enter the four- through eight-  
digit number that is specified in  
[Configuration] → [File Send Set-  
tings] → [FTP Server] → [Protect-  
ed Password] on the Web Status  
Monitor.  
Note  
❒ You can select the title under  
which each of the registered  
destinations is assigned in  
[Configuration] → [E-mail Set-  
tings] → [E-mail Address] →  
[Assign Title] on the Web Sta-  
tus Monitor.  
H Press [OK].  
C Highlight the FTP server name  
you want to select, and then  
press [Select].  
This returns to the screen that was  
This selects the check box next  
to the FTP server name.  
displayed in step .  
C
I Press [OK].  
This returns to the E-mail/Send  
File standby screen.  
To recall all available  
destinations  
8
A Press the {./*} (Title) key.  
List of titles appears on the  
screen.  
B Use the {1} or {0} key to  
highlight [All], and then press  
[OK].  
F Press [OK].  
The message “ Enter protection  
code for destination.” appears  
.
www.cnet.ie  
151  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sending Scan File by Scan to FTP  
Scanned Image Files Sent to FTP Servers  
This section describes how the file  
name and the file location of a  
scanned file are determined when  
you perform a Scan to FTP operation.  
File Names  
Files created by a Scan to FTP opera-  
tion are named as described below in  
accordance with the file name you  
specified.  
File Locations  
In case you did not specify a file  
name, the default file name “DOC”  
applies.  
A scanned file created by a Scan to  
FTP operation is sent to a folder on  
the FTP server that you specified, and  
is saved in a sub-folder inside of the  
specified folder. The sub-folder name  
is identical to the device name of this  
machine.  
❖ File names with time  
When [File Name + Time] (included  
under [Configuration] → [File Send  
Settings] → [File Send] on the Web  
Status Monitor) is set to “ On ”, file  
names are generated in the follow-  
ing manner.  
“Specified file name/Year  
/Month/Day/Hour/Minute/  
Second/(4-digit sequential  
number)”  
• Example 1:  
Specified FTP server: \\FTPserv-  
er\folder  
Device name of this machine:  
RNP6219DA  
File location:  
\\FTPserver\folder\RNP6219DA  
• Example 2:  
Note  
Specified file name: image  
File format: single page  
Original type: black white, text  
Pages: 2, two-sided  
Time when scanned: 2003/9/16  
/13:07:21  
The following files are generat-  
ed:  
image030916130721(0001).TIF  
image030916130721(0002).TIF  
image030916130721(0003).TIF  
image030916130721(0004).TIF  
❒ You can specify the device  
name of this machine using  
[Configuration] → [Basic Settings]  
→ [General Settings] → [Device  
Name].  
8
❒ If the specified directory does  
not exist in the FTP server, a di-  
rectory is automatically created.  
• Example 3:  
Specified file name: (none)  
File format: multi-page TIFF  
Original type: colour, full col-  
our  
Pages: 2, two-sided  
Time when scanned: 2003/9/16  
/13:07:21  
The following file is generated:  
DOC030916130721(0001).PDF  
www.cnet.ie  
152  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
           
Scanned Image Files Sent to FTP Servers  
❖ File names without time  
Note  
When [File Name + Time] (included  
under [Configuration] → [File Send  
Settings] → [File Send] on the Web  
Status Monitor) is set to “ Off ”, file  
names are generated in the follow-  
ing manner.  
❒ All the files created in the exam-  
ples 2 to 5 are saved to the same  
folder, which is explained in the  
example 1.  
❒ When you send scan files to the  
folder that you have already sent  
scan files before, be sure to assign a  
different file name if [File Name +  
Time] is set to “ Off ”. If you specify  
the same file name and file type  
that you specified in the previous  
Send File operation, the previous  
scan files are overwritten with new  
ones.  
“Specified file name/(4-digit se-  
quential number)”  
• Example 4:  
Specified file name: image  
File format: single page  
Original type: black white, text  
Pages: 2, two-sided  
Time when scanned: 2003/9/16  
/13:07:21  
The following files are generat-  
ed:  
image(0001).TIF  
image(0002).TIF  
image(0003).TIF  
image(0004).TIF  
• Example 5:  
Specified file name: (none)  
File format: multi-page TIFF  
Original type: colour, full col-  
our  
Original page count: 2, two-sid-  
ed  
8
Time when scanned: 2003/9/16  
/13:07:21  
The following file iss generated:  
DOC(0001).PDF  
Reference  
For details about file formats and  
extensions, see p.73 “File Type”.  
www.cnet.ie  
153  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Sending Scan File by Scan to FTP  
8
www.cnet.ie  
154  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
9. Sending Scan Files Using  
Delivery Server  
This chapter explains procedures to deliver a scanned file to multiple destina-  
tions by using a delivery server with ScanRouter V2 Professional/Lite installed.  
Procedure Breakdown  
The following overview diagram shows the flow of the steps for sending a  
scanned file using an address book on a delivery server. Note that the under-  
lined steps are essential.  
Note  
❒ Some of the steps such as making scan settings are identical to those ex-  
plained under “Sending Scan Files by E-mail”. See the relevant pages shown  
to the right of the following overview diagram.  
⇒ p.126 “Before Sending  
Place originals in the ADF or on the exposure glass.  
Scan Data”  
⇒ p.156 “Selecting De-  
Select a destination.  
livery Destinations”  
⇒ p.134 “Selecting a  
Sender”  
Select a sender.  
⇒ p.132 “Making Scan  
Settings”  
Make scan settings. *1  
⇒ p.135 “Performing  
Press the {Start} key.  
Scan Operation”  
Confirm the transmission results by using the Web Status ⇒ p.137 “Checking  
Monitor.  
Transmission Results”  
*1  
The settings that are configured using ScanRouter V2 Professional/Lite determine  
the file type and compression method of the image file to be distributed.  
www.cnet.ie  
155  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Sending Scan Files Using Delivery Server  
Selecting Delivery Destinations  
You can specify up to 100 destina-  
D Use the {1} and {0} keys to  
tions at a time, by selecting from the  
registered destinations in the address  
book of the delivery server.  
highlight the destination you  
want to select, and then press [Se-  
lect].  
A Press the {1} key.  
This selects the check box next to  
the destination.  
Note  
❒
appears next to a group des-  
tination.  
Note  
E Repeat steps and for selecting  
C
D
❒ You can skip this step when the  
Delivery Server standby screen  
is displayed.  
each of the additional destina-  
tions.  
Note  
The Delivery Server standby  
screen is displayed.  
❒ While highlighting a destina-  
tion with its check box selected,  
press [Clear] to clear the check  
box (this deselects the destina-  
tion).  
B Press [Dest.].  
To recall destinations using a title  
Note  
A Press the {./*} (Title) key.  
❒ If “On” is selected for [Auto Up-  
date Destination List] in [2.Send  
Scan Settings] under the Scanner  
Features menu on this machine,  
the destination list is automati-  
cally updated with the delivery  
server’s mail address book,  
when you press [Dest.]. See p.61  
“Auto Update Destination List”  
for details.  
List of titles appears on the  
screen.  
9
Note  
❒ The titles that are configured  
using ScanRouter V2 Profes-  
sional/Lite appear.  
B Use the {1} or {0} key to  
highlight the title you want to  
select, and then press [OK].  
The list of destinations registered  
to the delivery server appears.  
C Use [Next] and [Prev.] to scroll  
through the pages, and display  
the destination you want to select.  
The destinations assigned to the  
selected title are displayed.  
www.cnet.ie  
156  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Selecting Delivery Destinations  
Note  
F When you are finished, press [Ex-  
it].  
❒ You can select the title under  
which each of the registered  
destinations is assigned by  
using ScanRouter V2 Profes-  
sional/Lite.  
The Delivery Server standby  
screen appears. The first destina-  
tion you have selected appears at  
the second line of the screen. When  
you have selected multiple desti-  
nations, you can confirm them by  
using the {1} and {0} keys.  
C Highlight the destination you  
want to select, and then press  
[Select].  
Note  
❒ While highlighting a destina-  
tion with its check box select-  
ed, press [Clear] to clear the  
check box (this deselects the  
destination).  
❒ If you want to select from an-  
other title, press the {./*} (Ti-  
tle) key. This displays list of  
titles again.  
To recall all available  
destinations  
A Press the {./*} (Title) key.  
List of titles appears on the  
screen.  
B Use the {1} or {0} key to  
highlight [All], and then press  
[OK].  
9
www.cnet.ie  
157  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sending Scan Files Using Delivery Server  
9
www.cnet.ie  
158  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
10. Printing Scanned Image  
Files  
This chapter explains how to use "Print Scan" function, which enables you to  
print scan data directly by a printer.  
Procedure Breakdown  
The following overview diagram shows the flow of the steps for printing scan  
data using a registered printer.  
Note that the underlined steps are essential.  
⇒ p.160 “Before Printing  
Place the original(s) on the Exposure glass or on the ADF  
Scan Data”  
⇒ p.163 “Specifying the  
Specify the number of copies  
Number of Copies”  
⇒ p.163 “Configuring  
Configure print settings  
Print Settings”  
⇒ p.166 “Selecting a  
Printer”  
Select a printer  
⇒ p.167 “Selecting Col-  
Select colour or black and white for scanning  
our/Black and White”  
⇒ p.162 “Printing Scan  
Press the {Start} key.  
Data”  
Retrieve copies from the printer  
www.cnet.ie  
159  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Printing Scanned Image Files  
Before Printing Scan Data  
Reference  
About Print Scan Standby  
Screen  
See p.109 “Setting Originals” for  
information about how to place the  
originals on the ADF (Auto Docu-  
ment Feeder) or exposure glass,  
and about available paper size and  
weight.  
Before performing a Print Scan opera-  
tion, make sure that the Select Meth-  
od screen or Print Scan initial screen  
is displayed on the machine's display  
panel.  
Original Locations  
• When the message " Select destina-  
tion(s). " is displayed on the dis-  
play panel, the machine is  
standing by for Send Scan. Press  
[PrevMenu] to return to the Select  
Method screen.  
When you perform a Print Scan oper-  
ation, it is not necessary to select the  
location (ADF or exposure glass) for  
scanning. This machine automatically  
detects the originals placed on the  
ADF or the exposure glass, and scan  
is performed. Note, however, that the  
originals on the ADF are scanned  
when the originals are placed on both  
of the ADF and the exposure glass.  
• When the message " Connecting  
with PC... " is displayed on the dis-  
play panel, the machine is used  
from a client computer, and scan-  
ning is in progress. Wait until the  
job now in progress ends.  
About Paper Tray Settings  
You can specify a certain paper tray  
of a printer by selecting [Configuration]  
→ [Print Scan Settings] → [Printer] →  
[Paper Source Tray] on the Web Status  
Monitor. By using the control panel of  
this machine, you can select a specific  
printer, but you cannot select a specif-  
ic paper tray of a printer.  
10  
www.cnet.ie  
160  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
         
Before Printing Scan Data  
• When the message " Connecting  
with PC... Set original(s) and select  
the settings from the PC. " is dis-  
played on the display panel, the  
machine is standing by for the net-  
work TWAIN. Press [Exit].  
If there are no [Exit], the Network  
TWAIN exclusive standby screen  
is displayed. In this case, restart  
the machine.  
• When a send file path name is dis-  
played at the second line of the  
screen, the standby screen for [En-  
ter Custom Send File] is displayed. In  
this case, press [PrevMenu].  
10  
www.cnet.ie  
161  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Printing Scanned Image Files  
Printing Scan Data  
Follow the steps below to print scan  
data using Print Scan.  
• Color/Black and White  
The default setting selected us-  
ing [Colour:Full Colour] (in [3.Print  
Scan Settings] under the Scanner  
Features menu) is displayed at  
the left end of the third line of  
the screen. See p.167 “Selecting  
Colour/Black and White” for  
information about changing  
this setting.  
A Press the {2} key.  
Note  
❒ You can skip this step when the  
Print Scan standby screen is dis-  
played. See p.19 “Standby  
screens” for information about  
the Print Scan standby screen.  
• Other print settings  
The default settings configured  
using [Scan Type], [Image Densi-  
ty], [Original Size], and [Re-  
duce/Enlarge] in [5.Print Settings]  
under the Scanner Features  
menu are displayed as the sec-  
ond to fifth items on the third  
line of the screen. See p.163  
“Configuring Print Settings” to  
change these settings.  
The Print Scan standby screen is  
displayed.  
B Check if all the settings displayed  
on the screen (number of copies,  
printer, colour, and other print  
settings) are the way you want.  
C Press the {Start} key of this ma-  
chine.  
• Number of copies  
The number of copies is dis-  
played at the top right of the  
screen (default: 1). See p.163  
“Specifying the Number of  
Copies” for details about chang-  
ing the number of copies.  
ABK007S  
The original is scanned on this ma-  
chine, and the scan data is printed  
using the selected printer.  
10  
• Printer  
Note  
The default printer is selected  
using [Default Printer] in [Configu-  
ration] → [Print Scan Settings] →  
[Printer] on the Web Status Mon-  
itor. For details, see Web Status  
Monitor Help.  
❒ If you want to cancel printing,  
press the {Clear/Stop} key.  
The " Ready " message changes to "  
Printing... ".  
www.cnet.ie  
162  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Printing Scan Data  
Note  
Configuring Print Settings  
❒ Do not turn the power of this  
machine off while B is dis-  
played on the screen.  
When you perform a Print Scan oper-  
ation, you can change the settings ini-  
tially displayed on the screen (which  
settings are those that you have con-  
figured and registered to [Default] in  
[5.Print Settings] under the Scanner  
Features menu).  
D If you want to continue print scan  
data by scanning the originals on  
the exposure glass, repeat step  
B
and .  
C
A While the Print Scan standby  
screen is displayed, press [Print].  
Specifying the Number of  
Copies  
You can specify the number of copies  
within the range that you have con-  
figured using [Max. Number of Copies]  
in [3.Print Scan Settings] under the  
Scanner Features menu.  
The Print Settings screen is dis-  
played.  
A While the Print Scan standby  
screen is displayed, enter the  
number of copies you want by us-  
ing the number keys.  
B Select whether you configure the  
print settings manually, or use  
one of the user settings you have  
registered.  
This returns to the Print Scan  
standby screen, and the number  
you have entered is displayed at  
the top right of the screen  
Reference  
You can confirm the print set-  
tings you have registered. See  
p.165 “Confirming the Print Set-  
tings”.  
10  
Note  
❒ Press [Cancel] if you want to use  
the settings you have registered  
to [Default].  
❒ You cannot edit and save the  
settings that you have regis-  
tered to [User 1], [User 2] and [Us-  
er 3] here. If you want to use one  
of the user settings while chang-  
ing some of them, recall the user  
setting you want to use by high-  
lighting it and pressing [OK]  
first. And then, change the set-  
www.cnet.ie  
tings by selecting [Manual].  
163  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Printing Scanned Image Files  
Note  
To recall a registered print  
settings  
❒ Pressing [Cancel] discards the  
selected option, and returns  
to the previous screen.  
A Use the {1} or {0} key to  
highlight [User 1], [User 2] or  
[User 3] on the screen, and then  
press [OK].  
❒ When you select [Custom  
Size], use the number keys to  
enter the dimensions of the  
scan area (width and height).  
This returns to the Print Scan  
standby screen, and the corre-  
sponding print settings are dis-  
played on the third line of the  
screen.  
D Repeat steps B and C as nec-  
essary.  
When you are finished, make  
sure that the first page of the  
Print Settings screen (Print Set-  
tings 1/2) is displayed.  
To configure print settings  
manually  
E Press [Next].  
A Use the {1} or {0} key to  
highlight [Manual] on the  
screen, and then press [Set-  
tings].  
The second page of the Print  
Settings screen (Print Settings  
2/2) is displayed.  
The first page of the Print Set-  
tings screen ( Print Settings 1/2)  
is displayed.  
F Use the {1} or {0} key to  
highlight the setup items you  
want to change, and then press  
[Settings].  
B Use the {1} or {0} key to  
highlight the setup items you  
want to change, and then press  
[Settings].  
Note  
Reference  
10  
❒ If you change the settings in  
[Enlarge], [Reduce] and [Create  
Margin], only the latest setting  
that you have selected within  
all of these setup items ap-  
plies.  
See p.79 “Information to Reg-  
ister in [Print Settings]” for  
details about each of the set-  
up items.  
C Highlight the option you want  
to select by using the {1} or  
{0} keys (and [Next] or [Prev.]  
if necessary), and then press  
[OK].  
G Highlight the option you want  
to select by using the {1} or  
{0} keys, and then press [OK].  
www.cnet.ie  
164  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Printing Scan Data  
Note  
Confirming the Print Settings  
❒ While the setting screen for  
[Enlarge] or [Reduce] is dis-  
played, highlighting one of  
the preset ratio displays pairs  
of "original size → copy pa-  
per size" on the third line of  
the screen.  
You can confirm the current print set-  
tings, or the print settings that you  
have registered to [Default], [User 1],  
[User 2] or [User 3].  
Note  
❒ You can confirm the [Default] set-  
tings by selecting [Manual] in step B  
below, unless you configure the  
print settings manually. After you  
have manually configured the  
print settings, selecting [Manual]  
displays the current settings.  
H If you want to set a custom ra-  
tio for [Enlarge] or [Reduce],  
highlight the nearest preset ra-  
tio, press [Zoom], and then use  
the number keys (or [-] and [+] )  
to specify the ratio.  
A While the Print Scan standby  
screen is displayed, press [Print].  
I Press [OK].  
This saves the ratio you have  
entered, and returns to the sec-  
ond page of the Print Settings  
screen (Print Settings 2/2).  
The Print Settings screen is dis-  
played.  
Note  
B Use the {1} or {0} key to high-  
light [Manual], [User 1], [User 2] or  
[User 3] on the screen, and then  
press [Status].  
❒ Pressing [Cancel] discards the  
setting you have entered,  
and returns to the previous  
screen.  
J When you are finished, press  
[PrevMenu].  
This returns to the Print Settings  
screen.  
10  
The status screen of your selection  
appears.  
K Press [OK].  
C Use [Next] and [Prev.] to display  
the setting of the setup item you  
want to confirm.  
This returns to the Print Scan  
standby screen, and the print  
settings are displayed on the  
third line of the screen.  
D When you are finished, press [Ex-  
it].  
www.cnet.ie  
165  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Printing Scanned Image Files  
❒ While highlighting a printer  
name with its check box select-  
ed, press [Clear] to clear the  
check box (this deselects the  
printer).  
E Press [Cancel] or [OK].  
To recall printers using a title  
Note  
❒ If you want to apply the print  
A Press the {./*} (Title) key.  
settings you selected in step  
,
B
List of titles appears on the  
screen.  
press [OK]. If you want to exit  
the status screen without chang-  
ing anything, press [Cancel].  
Note  
This returns to the Print Scan  
standby screen.  
❒ Titles are displayed accord-  
ing to the settings in [Configu-  
ration] → [Basic Settings] →  
[Scanner] → [Select Title] on  
the Web Status Monitor.  
Selecting a Printer  
When you perform a Print Scan oper-  
ation, you can select a printer other  
than the default printer (that is select-  
ed using [Default Printer] in [Configura-  
tion] → [Print Scan Settings] → [Printer]  
on the Web Status Monitor).  
B Use the {1} or {0} key to  
highlight the title you want to  
select, and then press [OK].  
A While the Print Scan standby  
screen is displayed, press [Printer].  
The printers assigned to the se-  
lected title are displayed.  
Note  
❒ You can select the title under  
which each of the registered  
printers is assigned in [Con-  
figuration] → [Print Scan Set-  
tings] → [Printer] → [Assign  
Title] on the Web Status Mon-  
itor.  
B Highlight the printer you want to  
select by using the {1} or {0}  
keys (and [Next] or [Prev.] if neces-  
sary), and then press [Select].  
10  
C Highlight the printer you want  
to select, and then press [Se-  
lect].  
This selects the check box next to  
the printer name.  
Note  
❒ Selecting another printer auto-  
matically deselects the printer  
currently selected (so the check  
www.cnet.ie  
mark next to the printer is  
cleared).  
166  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Printing Scan Data  
Note  
Selecting Colour/Black and  
White  
❒ While highlighting a printer  
name with its check box se-  
lected, press [Clear] to clear  
the check box (this deselects  
the printer).  
When you perform a Print Scan oper-  
ation, you can select between "colour"  
scanning and "black and white" scan-  
ning. If you do not select this setting,  
the default setting selected using [Col-  
our/Black and White] (in [3.Print Scan Set-  
tings] under the Scanner Features  
menu) applies.  
❒ If you want to select from an-  
other title, press the {./*} (Ti-  
tle) key. This displays list of  
titles again.  
To recall all available printers  
A While the Print Scan standby  
screen is displayed, press [CLR  
/B&W].  
A Press the {./*} (Title) key.  
List of titles appears on the  
screen.  
B Use the {1} or {0} key to  
highlight [All], and then press  
[OK].  
B Use the {1} or {0} key to high-  
light [Black and White] or [Colour] on  
the screen.  
C When you are finished, press [Ex-  
it].  
This returns to the Print Scan  
standby screen.  
Note  
❒ When the above screen is dis-  
played, currently selected op-  
tion is highlighted.  
10  
C While the option you want is  
highlighted, press [OK].  
This returns to the Print Scan  
standby screen.  
Note  
❒ Pressing [Cancel] discards the  
selected option, and returns to  
the previous screen.  
www.cnet.ie  
167  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Printing Scanned Image Files  
10  
www.cnet.ie  
168  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
11. Appendix  
Troubleshooting  
Error Indicators  
The following table shows the meaning of error indicators of this machine, and  
how to fix the errors.  
Error description  
Solution  
The ADF or ADF cover is Close the ADF or ADF  
not fully closed. cover.  
An original is jammed in Removed the jammed  
the ADF. original.  
b
An original was not out- Remove the paper that  
put properly from the  
ADF.  
was not output properly.  
System error  
Contact your service rep-  
resentative.  
b
b
b
b
: ON  
b: Blinking  
: OFF  
Note  
❒ When the indicators show a status that is not listed the above table (or in the  
table under “Front indicators” ⇒ p.16 ), turn off the power of this machine,  
and then back on. If the indicators still show the same status, note the status  
of the indicators and contact your service representative.  
www.cnet.ie  
169  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Appendix  
C Open the ADF.  
When the Machine does not  
Work as Expected  
D Lower the green tab and remove if  
the original is jammed.  
When the original is jammed in the  
ADF, remove the original by the fol-  
lowing procedure.  
A Open the ADF cover and remove  
if the original is jammed.  
ZDLH250J  
ZDLH230J  
B Open the original table and re-  
move if the original is jammed.  
ZDLH240J  
11  
www.cnet.ie  
170  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Troubleshooting  
When Scanning is Not Performed as Expected  
Condition  
Possible Cause and Required Action  
The scanned image is dirty.  
•
•
Exposure glass, the ADF exposure glass,  
white sheet or original roller is dirty.  
Clean the exposure glass, the ADF expo-  
sure glass, white sheet, or original roller ⇒  
p.180 “Cleaning”  
Image is distorted or out of position.  
•
•
The original was moved while scanning.  
Do not move the original while scanning.  
The original was not pressed flat against  
the exposure glass. Make sure that the orig-  
inal is pressed flat against the exposure  
glass.  
The scanned image is upside down.  
No image results from scanning.  
•
•
The original was placed upside down.  
Place the original in the correct orientation.  
⇒ p.112 “Original Orientation”  
The original was placed with the front and  
back reversed. When the original is placed  
directly on the exposure glass, the side to  
be scanned must face down. When the  
original is fed via the ADF, the side to be  
scanned must face up.  
The printer that you have specified for print-  
ing scanned data does not print after you per-  
form a Print Scan operation.  
•
•
If an error message is shown on the display  
of this machine, see p.172 “When an Error  
Message Appears” to eliminate the error.  
If no error message is displayed on this ma-  
chine, it means an error has occurred on the  
printer, or the printer may not be config-  
ured properly. Confirm that the printer op-  
erates normally, and is properly  
configured. See the manual that comes  
with the printer.  
11  
www.cnet.ie  
171  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
When an Error Message Appears  
When an error message appears, see the following lists of error messages to find  
possible causes of the error, and take the steps necessary to eliminate the cause  
of the error.  
The lists are classified into several categories such as “Scanner Unit Error Mes-  
sages”, “Scan Settings Error Messages” and “Send Scan Operation Error Mes-  
sages”, making it easy for you to find the error you encounter.  
This section includes all the error messages that are displayed on this machine,  
and also includes some of the error messages displayed on the Web Status Mon-  
itor.  
Note  
❒ If an error message that is not contained in this section appears, turn off the  
power of this machine, and then back on. If the message still is shown, note  
the content of the message and the error number and contact your service rep-  
resentative.  
Reference  
See the network TWAIN driver help when an error message appears on the  
client computer from which you use this machine as a network TWAIN scan-  
ner.  
Scanner unit error message  
Message  
Possible Cause and Required Action  
•
•
The ADF cover is open. Close it.  
Cover Open  
Close ADF Cover.  
[Exit]  
Some pages are jammed in the ADF. Re-  
move the jammed pages.  
Paper MisfeedRemove the origi-  
nal(s) in ADF.  
[Exit]  
•
•
Confirm that the scanner is properly con-  
nected to the network.  
Functional ProblemsTurn opera-  
tion switch off then on. If the  
same error occurs again, please  
call service.  
When the machine is moved from a cold lo-  
cation to a warm location, sudden temper-  
ature changes cause condensation inside of  
the scanner. Wait one hour or more before  
turning on the scanner to allow the conden-  
sation to evaporate.  
11  
•
Restart the scanner. If the error appears  
again, note the contents of the error mes-  
sage and the error number, and contact a  
service centre. ("SC4xxx" is the error  
number. The number displayed differs ac-  
cording to the error type.)  
www.cnet.ie  
172  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Troubleshooting  
Scan settings error messages  
Message  
Possible Cause and Required Action  
The original is not on the exposure glass, or it  
is placed but the scan size cannot be automati-  
cally detected.  
Cannot detect the scan size. Check  
whether the original is set, then  
select the proper size.  
•
If the original is not there, place it on the ex-  
posure glass.  
[Exit]  
•
Because the scanner detects the scan size  
when the ADF is opened and closed, make  
sure you open the ADF to an angle of 30 de-  
grees or more.  
•
Small size paper and some paper sizes may  
not be detected automatically. For details,  
see p.110 “The Original Sizes Available for  
Auto Detection” .  
11  
www.cnet.ie  
173  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
Message  
Possible Cause and Required Action  
Scanning of the first original has failed.  
Exceeded Job Delivery Data Max.  
Scanning will be stopped and  
the scanned data will be delet-  
ed.  
•
Confirm the setting in [4.Scan Settings] →  
[Scan Type]. If “ Colour:Full Colour ” is se-  
lected, change to another option. “ Black  
and White:Text ” is good for scanning most  
monochrome originals, and even “ Black  
and White:Text/Photo ” is enough for  
scanning originals in 2 colors (e.g. an origi-  
nal containing text printed in black and  
charts drawn in red).  
[Exit]  
•
•
Confirm the setting in [4.Scan Settings] →  
[Resolution]. Specify a lower resolution, if  
the current setting is unnecessarily high.  
Normally, 200dpi or lower resolution set-  
ting is enough for scanning text.  
Set [Compression (Black and White)] in [2.Send  
Scan Settings] to “ On ” when [Scan Type] in  
[4.Scan Settings] is set to one of the “ Black  
and White ” options.  
Set [Compression (Gray Scale/Full Colour)] in  
[2.Send Scan Settings] to an option that is  
higher than the current setting, when [Scan  
Type] in [4.Scan Settings] is set to one of the  
“ Colour ” options.  
•
Make the value of the following settings  
larger using the Web Status Monitor:  
•
[Configuration] → [E-mail Settings] → [E-  
mail] → [Max. E-mail Size] when sending  
scan data as an e-mail attachment  
•
[Configuration] → [Delivery Settings] →  
[Delivery] → [Job Delivery Data Max. Set-  
ting] when sending scan data using a  
delivery server  
•
[Configuration] → [File Send Settings] →  
[File Send] → [Job Delivery Data Max. Set-  
ting] when sending scan data to a Win-  
dows shared folder or an FTP server  
Scanning of the second or subsequent original  
has failed.  
Exceeded Job Delivery Data Max.  
Send the current scanned data  
or delete to cancel this job.  
11  
•
To send the data up to the previous page  
scanned, press [Send]. After the B mark on  
the screen disappears, press the {Start} key  
to scan the remaining pages.  
[ Delete ] [ Send ]  
•
If you press [Delete], scanned data is delet-  
ed and the document is not sent. Try scan-  
ning with such settings that make data size  
smaller, or perform scanning several times  
to create a number of separate files, each of  
which file size is small enough for a Send  
Scan operation.  
www.cnet.ie  
174  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
Send Scan (E-mail, Send File (SMB/FTP) or Delivery Server) operation error messages  
Message  
Possible Cause and Required Action  
•
When “ On ” is selected for [Auto Update  
Destination List] in [2.Send Scan Settings] on  
this machine, pressing [Dest.] accesses the  
sender and destination information from  
the delivery server, and updates the ad-  
dress book. This function allows you access  
the latest destination information. Depend-  
ing on the number of destinations and  
senders registered, and the network condi-  
tions, you may have to wait a moment  
while the address book is being updated.  
Updating the destination list...  
Please wait.  
Address book (list of destinations and send-  
ers) information could not be accessed on the  
delivery server. Click [Yes] and try again. If the  
same message appears, one of the following  
may have occurred.  
Updating destination list failed.  
Do you want to try again?  
[Yes][No]  
•
The delivery server is not turned on, or it is  
not being serviced.  
•
The delivery server is temporarily down  
for reasons such as insufficient memory.  
•
If you specified to perform a Scan to Folder  
(SMB) operation, check if the power of the  
computer on which the Windows shared  
folder exists is turned on.  
Cannot communicate with the serv-  
er. Check the server status and  
connection.  
[Exit]  
•
•
If you specified to perform a Send Scan op-  
eration using a delivery server, check if the  
delivery server is turned on.  
If you specified to perform a [Enter Custom  
Send File] operation using the Web Status  
Monitor, click [Back] on the Web browser,  
enter [Login Password], and then click [Test].  
If the message “Connection to the File Send  
Path has failed. Confirm the settings.” is  
displayed, [File Send Path] is not specified  
correctly.  
•
The machine failed to send scanned data  
due to a network connection problem. Af-  
ter confirming that the network cable is  
properly connected, try performing anoth-  
er Send Scan operation using the same set-  
tings.If the same message appears, there  
may be network congestion. Consult your  
network administrator.  
Sending data has failed. Scan  
with the same settings and re-  
send.  
11  
[Exit]  
www.cnet.ie  
175  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
Message  
Possible Cause and Required Action  
•
Continued scanning and reached the max-  
imum scan limit (100 pages). Press [Exit].  
The scanned original is sent. The specified  
destination and scanning condition set-  
tings remain the same even after you have  
pressed [Exit]. Place the next original and  
press the {Start} key.  
Exceeded max. scan pages. To scan  
remaining pages as a new job,  
press [Exit] then press the Start  
key.  
[Exit]  
Print Scan operation error messages  
Message  
Possible Cause and Required Action  
•
•
•
The printer you have selected for printing is currently  
offline. Press the {Online} key on the printer to make it  
online. Press [Exit] to start printing.  
Printer is offline. Check  
the printer.  
[Exit]  
The printer is currently in use. Press [Exit] to cancel the  
print job (this discards the scan data), and try again lat-  
er.  
The printer is current-  
ly in use. Cannot print.  
[Exit]  
The printer is not compatible with this machine. Select  
other printer that is supported for use with this ma-  
chine.  
Selected printer is not  
supported. Check the  
printer.  
[Exit]  
•
The printer is not responding. Check if the power of  
the printer is turned on, and the cables are connected  
correctly.  
No response from the de-  
vice. Check the power and  
cables.  
[Exit]  
•
•
The printer is not ready to print, because it is still  
warming up. Wait until the printer is ready.  
Warming up... Check the  
printer.  
[Exit]  
Take the necessary actions in accordance with the mes-  
sage that is displayed. See the manual that comes with  
the printer for information about adding paper, replac-  
ing toner bottle, closing the cover of the printer, or  
clearing misfeeds.  
Add paper to the print-  
er.  
[Exit]  
Add TonerReplace Toner  
Bottle in the printer.  
11  
[Exit]  
Cover Open Check the  
printer.  
[Exit]  
Paper MisfeedCheck the  
printer.  
[Exit]  
•
The printer has functional problems other than those  
mentioned above. Check to make sure that the printer  
operates normally. See the manual that comes with the  
Functional ProblemsCheck  
the printer.  
www.cnet.ie  
[Exit]  
printer.  
176  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Troubleshooting  
Error messages displayed on the Web Status Monitor  
Message  
Possible Cause and Required Action  
•
The format for entering [Login User Name] is incorrect.  
Confirm that [Login User Name] is specified in the for-  
mat of "work group name\user name" or "domain  
name\user name". For example, when the work group  
name is “abcd” and the user name is “john”, enter “ab-  
cd\john” into [Login User Name].  
Wrong parameter for  
Login User Name.  
•
•
The information entered to [File Send Path], [Login User  
Name], or [Login Password] is incorrect. When entering  
information, be careful not to mix up upper case letters  
and lower case letters.  
Wrong parameter for  
File Send Path Name.  
In most cases, it is required to enter the password into  
[Login Password] for the user entered in [Login User  
Name]. However, when accessing a shared folder that is  
password protected under Windows 95/98/98  
SE/Me, it is necessary to enter the shared folder’s pro-  
tection password into [Login Password]. Confirm the  
operating system of the computer that you are trying  
to access, and make necessary settings in accordance  
with it, as described the above.  
•
•
This machine is currently used as a network TWAIN  
scanner, by another client computer.  
Unable to make configu-  
rations because Scanner  
is currently in use.  
You may be trying another [Enter Custom Send File] op-  
eration. Before performing another [Enter Custom Send  
File] operation, it is necessary to press [PrevMenu] on the  
control panel of this machine to display a Send File  
standby screen.  
Please try again later.  
Other Problems  
Problem  
Possible Cause and Required Action  
Two or more units of this machine  
with the same (or similar) device  
name exist on the same network.  
•
You can change the device name of this machine from  
[Configuration] → [Basic Settings] → [General Settings] →  
[Device Name] on the Web Status Monitor. The factory  
default for the device name is “RNP******” (“******” is  
the last six digit of the machine’s MAC address). When  
you change the device name, note that you cannot  
change to a name that starts with “RNP”.  
11  
www.cnet.ie  
177  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendix  
Problem  
Possible Cause and Required Action  
Cannot login to this machine us-  
ing a Web browser.  
•
•
Check the display panel of this machine. When the  
Scanner Features menu is displayed, it becomes una-  
vailable to access this machine using a Web browser.  
Press [Exit] or the {User Tools} key to return to a standby  
screen. See p.22 “Scanner Features Menu”  
Check if the IP address of this machine is correctly con-  
figured, in accordance with the assignment of the net-  
work that this machine belongs. When configured  
incorrectly, it is not possible to access this machine us-  
ing a Web browser. You can confirm the IP address of  
this machine using [IP Address] in [1.System Settings] un-  
der Scanner Features menu.If the IP address of this ma-  
chine is set to “11.22.33.44”, it means that you haven’t  
configured this machine yet, or all the settings of this  
machine have returned to their default values for some  
reasons. In this case, you have to configure all the nec-  
essary settings including the IP address and scan set-  
tings, etc.  
•
When you use this machine on a DHCP environment,  
and when the IP address of this machine is allocated  
dynamically, the machine’s IP address changes each  
time this machine turns on. Under this condition, it is  
necessary for you to check the current IP address of this  
machine, and then enter the address to a Web browser  
from which you access this machine. (It makes no sense  
to add the current address to favorite, because it chang-  
es each time this machine turns on.) If it is possible, we  
recommend you to assign an IP address of this machine  
statistically, even when you use this machine on a  
DHCP environment. You still have to select “ DHCP ”  
for [Network Boott] in [1.System Settings] to have the IP  
address of this machine allocated automatically.  
No response from the display  
panel when it is touched.  
•
•
The display panel of this machine is not a touch panel.  
To use keys displayed on the screen, press the function  
keys. See p.15 “Using Keys Displayed on the Screen” .  
Entered information or selected  
option is cleared while operating.  
Auto Reset Timer is activated.After a specified period  
of the last operation, this machine automatically re-  
turns to the state immediately after power-on. You can  
change the time after which the Auto Reset Timer  
works, or even disable it. See p.59 “Auto Reset Timer” .  
11  
This machine does not work in ac-  
cordance with the scan settings  
configured on the Web Status  
Monitor.  
•
After configuring the scan settings (specifically, after  
clicking [OK] on the [Scan Settings] screen) on the Web  
Status Monitor, press the {Clear Modes} key. By press-  
ing the {Clear Modes} key, the settings under [Scan Set-  
tings] of this machine instantly reflect the settings  
configured using the Web Status Monitor.  
www.cnet.ie  
178  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Troubleshooting  
Problem  
Possible Cause and Required Action  
Some of the registered destina-  
tions are not displayed on the des-  
tination list.  
•
Check if [All] is displayed at the top right corner of the  
“ Select destination(s). ” screen.  
If another title like [A], [B] or [Freq.] is on the screen, it  
means that you have searched destinations using the  
{./*} (Title) key, and only the matched destinations are  
currently available for selection. In this case, press the  
{./*} (Title) key, highlight [All], and then press [OK]. See  
p.129 “To recall all available destinations” for details.  
The e-mail destinations (including When you perform a Send Scan operation, note the follow-  
Cc destinations) are cleared when ing things.  
a file name is specified.  
•
You cannot use the following functions at the same  
time:  
•
•
•
Scan to E-mail (referred to as “e-mail function”  
here)  
Scan to Folder (SMB) (referred to as “SMB function”  
here)  
Scan to FTP (referred to as “FTP function” here)  
When you select [File Name] and then press [Settings] on  
the screen shown above, it means that you select either  
of the SMB or FTP function, and the e-mail function is  
disabled. Because of this, the e-mail destinations are  
cleared automatically.lSpecifying [To:], [Cc:], or [Sub-  
ject] disables the SMB or FTP function. Specifying [SMB]  
disables the e-mail and FTP function. Specifying [FTP]  
disables the e-mail and SMB function.  
11  
www.cnet.ie  
179  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix  
Cleaning  
R WARNING:  
Cleaning the Exposure Glass,  
ADF Exposure Glass, White  
Sheet, and White Plate  
•
Never remove any covers or screws oth-  
er than those specified in this manual.  
The inside of the scanner contains high-  
voltage components that can cause elec-  
trical shock. Have all inspections, ad-  
justments, and repairs inside the  
scanner performed by an authorized  
dealer only.  
R CAUTION:  
•
Be careful not to pinch your fingers  
when closing the Automatic Document  
Feeder (ADF).  
•
Do not attempt to modify this scanner in  
any way. Modification can cause fire  
orelectrical shock.  
A
B
Turn off the power of the scanner  
and unplug the power cord from  
the outlet.  
R CAUTION:  
•
When disconnecting the power cord, al-  
Wipe off the scanner with a dry,  
soft cloth.  
ways make sure to hold onto the plug.  
Do not pull on the power cord itself.  
This can cause damage to the cord, fire  
or electrical shock.  
We recommend periodically cleaning  
the scanner to ensure that it is in opti-  
mum operating condition. First, wipe  
off the scanner with a dry, soft cloth.  
Next, dampen a soft cloth with water,  
wring it out tightly, and then wipe off  
the scanner. Use a neutral detergent  
for exterior portions of the scanner  
where soiling cannot be removed  
with water alone. Wipe off the rubber  
rollers with ethyl alcohol, and then  
wipe with a cloth dampened with wa-  
ter. Finally, wipe off the rollers and  
exterior with a dry cloth to remove  
any excess moisture.  
ADG017S  
1. White Plate  
2. White Sheet  
3. ADF Exposure Glass  
4. Exposure Glass  
11  
Important  
❒ Do not use volatile chemicals such  
as benzene, paint thinner or spray  
with insecticides. This can cause  
deformation, discoloration and  
cracking.  
❒ Wipe off the Automatic Document  
Feeder (ADF) with a dry, clean  
cloth when there is dust or soiling  
www.cnet.ie  
present inside.  
180  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
     
Cleaning  
Cleaning the Feed Roller  
Cleaning the Document Roller  
A Turn off the power of the scanner A Turn off the power of the scanner  
and unplug the power cord from  
the outlet.  
and unplug the power cord from  
the outlet.  
B Open the cover of the Automatic B Open the cover of the Automatic  
Document Feeder (ADF). Document Feeder (ADF).  
ZDLH070J  
ZDLH070J  
C Open the roller unit. While turn- C While turning it with your fin-  
ing it with your fingers, wipe off  
the Feed Roller with a tightly  
wrung out cloth dampened with  
water.  
gers, wipe off the Document Roll-  
er (A) with a tightly wrung out  
cloth dampened with water.  
ZDLH190J  
ZDLH080J  
11  
Note  
❒ Always make sure to clean the  
Feed Roller after scanning a  
document written in pencil or  
other material that is not firmly  
fixed to the paper. Failure to  
clean the Feed Roller can cause  
soiling of the next document  
scanned.  
www.cnet.ie  
181  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendix  
Cleaning the Document  
Rolling Unit  
A Turn off the power of the scanner  
and unplug the power cord from  
the outlet.  
B Open the cover of the Automatic  
Document Feeder (ADF).  
ZDLH070J  
C Open the Document Tray and  
wipe off the Document Rolling  
Unit with a tightly wrung out  
cloth dampened with water.  
ZDLH090J  
11  
www.cnet.ie  
182  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Moving and Transporting the Scanner  
Moving and Transporting the Scanner  
R CAUTION:  
Moving Over Short Distance  
•
This scanner weighs approximately 29  
kg.  
•
When lifting, please make sure to lift  
slowly so as to minimize physical strain  
with two persons or more while holding  
onto the handles located in the center on  
both sides. Failure to lift using proper  
caution, reckless handling or allowing  
the scanner to drop can cause injury.  
A Turn off the power of the scanner  
and unplug the power cord from  
the outlet.  
B Disconnect all cables connected  
to the scanner.  
C Transport the scanner.  
•
When transporting over long distances,  
please consult an authorized dealer.  
• Safety laws and regulations (in-  
cluding those stipulating radio  
wave regulations and material reg-  
ulations) differ in each country.  
Use of this product and its con-  
sumable supplies, etc. in foreign  
countries in violation of these reg-  
ulations may be punishable by  
law.  
ZDLH370  
• Information regarding measures  
for ensuring safe transport can be  
obtained from an authorized deal-  
er. However, packaging and trans-  
port are to be performed by the  
customer.  
Important  
❒ Try to keep the scanner as level  
as possible during transport.  
11  
www.cnet.ie  
183  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendix  
Transporting the Scanner  
A Turn on the Power Switch. Allow  
the scanner to remain on for at  
least 20 seconds, and then turn it  
off.  
B Set the Lock Switch on the left  
side of the scanner to the {Lock}  
position.  
ZDLH380  
C Remove the control panel unit  
from the scanner unit, and discon-  
nect all cables connected to the  
scanner.  
D Place the scanner in the original  
box and transport.  
Important  
❒ This scanner is a precision de-  
vice. Be careful so that it is not  
damaged during transport.  
❒ Use the cushioning materials  
provided with the scanner atthe  
time of purchase.  
11  
www.cnet.ie  
184  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Disposing of the Scanner  
Disposing of the Scanner  
When you want to dispose of your  
scanner, contact your dealer or a serv-  
ice representative.  
Important  
❒ Never dispose of the lithium bat-  
teries by incineration. This can  
cause them to rupture resulting in  
injury.  
Note  
❒ Please return used NIC boards to  
our authorized dealer or service  
representative. Your cooperation  
with our recycling activities is ap-  
preciated.  
❒ NIC boards are equipped with a  
lithium battery. In the case NIC  
boards are disposed of by the cus-  
tomer, please dispose them in ac-  
cordance with national or local  
regulations after separating the  
lithium batteries from the NIC  
board.  
11  
www.cnet.ie  
185  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
Using Wireless LAN  
This section describes the setting pro-  
cedure related to network when the  
optional “Expansion wireless LAN  
board type BII” is used  
Configuring Wireless LAN  
Settings  
Preparation  
Preparation  
It is necessary to change the net-  
work settings of the computer that  
you use for configuring wireless  
LAN settings. Be sure to note your  
computer’s network settings be-  
fore you change them, for refer-  
ence when you restore the settings  
afterwards.  
Prepare a 10BASE-T or 100BASE-  
TX cross network cable before-  
hand. When you use a network de-  
vice as a hub, prepare a 10BASE-T  
or 100BASE-TX straight network  
cable.  
Outline to Use Wireless LAN  
A Connect a computer to this ma-  
You can configure settings for a wire-  
less LAN card using [Configuration] →  
[Basic Settings] → [TCP/IP] on the Web  
Status Monitor. Before getting start-  
ed, it is necessary to prepare for log-  
ging in the Web Status Monitor.  
chine.  
When you use a cross network  
cable  
A Connect a cross network cable  
to the network interface con-  
nector of this machine.  
Make preparations to log in to the web  
status monitor.  
Connect this machine and a com-  
puter using a network cable tem-  
porarily  
Sample setting for this machine:  
IP Address : 192.168.1.2  
Subnet Mask :  
255.255.255.0  
Sample setting for the computer:  
IP Address : 192.168.1.3  
Subnet Mask :  
ADG004S  
11  
B Connect the other end of the  
255.255.255.0  
cable to the computer.  
Use the Web Status Monitor to config-  
ure the wireless LAN settings.  
www.cnet.ie  
186  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Using Wireless LAN  
E Press the {1} key.  
When you use a hub  
A Connect a straight network ca-  
ble to the network interface  
connector of this machine.  
The System Settings menu is dis-  
played, and “1. Function Priority ”  
appears as the setup item currently  
selected.  
F Press [Next].  
“1. IP Address ” input screen will  
appear.  
“2. IP Address ” appears as the set-  
up item currently selected.  
ADG004S  
B Connect the other end of the  
cable to an available connector  
of the hub.  
G Press [OK].  
C Confirm that the computer is  
connected to the hub B.  
When not connected, connect  
the computer to the hub using a  
10BASE-T or 100BASE-TX  
straight network cable.  
H
Enter “192.168.1.2” with the number  
keys  
.
B Change the computer's IP address  
to 192.168.1.3, and subnet mask to  
255.255.255.0.  
C Restart the computer.  
Note  
The computer's IP address is  
changed to 192.168.1.3.  
❒ Input each part of the IP address  
in three digits.  
D Press the {User Tools} key on this  
❒ You can use {1} (or {#} ) and  
{0} keys to move the high-  
lighting to right and left.  
machine.  
11  
❒ You can use the {Clear/Stop} key  
to clear the three-digit number  
currently highlighted.  
ABK006S  
I Press [OK].  
This returns to the System Settings  
menu.  
The scanner Features menu ap-  
pears.  
J Press [↓Next].  
“3. Subnet Mask ” appears as the  
www.cnet.ie  
setup item currently selected.  
187  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendix  
K Set [Subnet Mask] to 255.255.255.0  
P
Turn off the power of this ma-  
chine, Insert the wireless LAN  
card to the PC Card slot on the  
rear panel, and then attach the  
card slot cover.  
in the same way as you have done  
in steps through .  
G
J
“4. Default Gateway Address ” ap-  
pears as the setup item currently  
selected.  
L Press [Next] three times, and then  
press [OK].  
The setting screen for “7. Network  
Boot ” appears.  
M Confirm that [7. Network Boot] is set  
to “ NONE ”, and press [Cancel].  
ADG005S  
Reference  
⇒ p.29 “Inserting a Wireless  
LAN Card”  
Note  
❒ “*” mark appears along with the  
Q
R
Turn ON the power of this ma-  
chine.  
option currently selected.  
❒ If [7.Network Boot] is set to “  
DHCP ”, change it to “ NONE ”,  
and then press [OK].  
Start a Web browser on the com-  
puter, and enter “http://192.168.  
1.2/” in the address bar.  
N
Confirm that [10.Transmission Speed]  
is set to “ Auto ” and [11.LAN Type] is  
set to “ Ethernet ”, in the same way  
that you have done for [7.Network  
Boot].  
Reference  
For details about the Web Sta-  
tus Monitor, see p.84 “Access-  
ing the Scanner”.  
S
Click [Configuration] on the main  
menu.  
O Press [PrevMenu], and then [Exit].  
This exits the Scanner Features  
menu, and returns to the standby  
screen that is displayed when you  
turn the power on.  
The password input dialog box  
appears.  
Note  
11  
❒ Once you set the password, the  
password input dialog box will  
not appear from the second  
time. When the dialog doesn’t  
Important  
❒ Never turn off the power of this  
machine before the standby  
screen is displayed. Doing so  
can discard all the settings you  
have configured, and return this  
machine to its factory default  
status.  
appear, proceed to step .  
U
www.cnet.ie  
188  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Using Wireless LAN  
• Ad hoc mode  
T
Enter “scanner” for the user name,  
enter the password, and then click  
A method of communicating  
with other computers, peer  
to peer, without an access  
point. The same communica-  
tion channel must be used for  
all computers.  
[OK]  
.
Note  
❒ User name is fixed to “scanner”.  
❒ The initial factory default pass-  
word is “password”. You can  
change the password using  
[Configuration] → [Basic Settings]  
→ [Password].  
• 802.11 Ad hoc mode  
A method of communicating  
with other computers, peer  
to peer, without an access  
point. The same communica-  
tion channel and SSID must  
be used for all computers.  
The setup screen appears.  
U Click [Basic Settings], and then  
[TCP/IP] on the sub-menu.  
❖ SSID  
Enter the SSID (Service Set Iden-  
tifier) you want to use, using up  
to 32 characters. The SSID cur-  
rently in use appears in paren-  
theses.  
This information appears if  
[802.11 Ad hoc mode] or [Infra-  
structure mode] is selected in the  
[ Communication Mode ] list.  
The SSID is an identifier used  
when connecting between an  
access point and a wireless LAN  
client. Only a wireless LAN cli-  
ent and an access point that  
have the same SSID can com-  
municate with each other.  
V Make settings to each of the setup  
items on the screen.  
Reference  
⇒ p.52 “System Settings”  
❖ LAN Type  
Switch between network inter-  
face board and wireless LAN  
(IEEE 802.11b) board. Be sure to  
set this item to “IEEE 802.11b”.  
❖ Network Boot  
Select [DHCP] to use the DHCP  
server to make network settings  
automatically. When using DH-  
CP, the IP address, subnet  
mask, and default gateway ad-  
dress obtained from the DHCP  
server are used.  
❖ Channel  
If [802.11 Ad hoc mode] or [Ad hoc  
mode] is selected in the [Commu-  
nication Mode] list, select a com-  
munication channel.  
Select [NONE] to make network  
settings manually.  
11  
The channel is a set radio fre-  
quency used for wireless LAN  
(IEEE 802.11b). Computers us-  
ing the same channel can com-  
municate with each other.  
❖ Communication Mode  
Select the communication  
mode.  
• Infrastructure mode  
A method of communicating  
with other computers via an  
access point. The SSID must  
be the same as the one set for  
the access point.  
www.cnet.ie  
189  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendix  
❖ WEP Setting  
Y Restore the network settings on  
Select whether to enable or dis-  
able WEP (Wired Equivalent  
Privacy) encryption.  
the computer.  
Z Turn off the power of this ma-  
chine, and then back on to acti-  
vate the settings.  
WEP encryption protects wire-  
less data communication. To  
communicate using WEP, data  
from both transmitting and re-  
ceiving computers must be set  
with the same WEP Key. To en-  
able WEP encryption, select [En-  
able] in the list, and then enter  
the WEP key in the [WEP Key]  
box.  
Note  
❒ When you change the [LAN  
Type] setting and/or change the  
[Network Boot] setting from “  
NONE ” to “ DHCP ”, it is es-  
sential to restart this machine to  
activate the changes.  
❒ In infrastructure mode, signal  
strength of the wireless LAN  
appears as a percentage at the  
Web Status Monitor’s [Wireless  
LAN Signal] (that is included un-  
der [Configuration] → [Basic Set-  
tings] → [TCP/IP] ), or [Wireless  
LAN Signal] in [1.System Settings]  
under Scanner Features menu  
on this machine. The following  
list provides an indication of the  
signal strength of the wireless  
LAN. Note, however, that the  
wireless LAN connection may  
fail due to noise or other rea-  
sons, even when [Wireless LAN  
Signal] displays a percentage  
that falls “Good” in the follow-  
ing list.  
❖ WEP Key and Confirm WEP Key  
The same WEP key must be en-  
tered in [WEP Key] and [Confirm  
WEP Key] boxes.  
• 64 bit Key  
When [Enable] is selected in  
the [WEP Setting] list, enter a  
10-digit hexadecimal WEP  
key value in [WEP Key] and  
[Confirm WEP Key] boxes. En-  
ter the WEP key value with-  
out the prefix "0x". The value  
entered appears as "*".  
• 128 bit Key  
When [Enable] is selected in  
the [WEP Setting] list, enter a  
26-digit hexadecimal WEP  
key value in [WEP Key] and  
[Confirm WEP Key] boxes. A  
128-bit key provides higher  
security than a 64-bit key. En-  
ter the WEP key value with-  
out the prefix "0x". The value  
entered appears as "*".  
• 100∼76% : Best  
• 75∼41% : Good  
• 40∼21% : Poor  
11  
• 20∼0% : Communication im-  
possible  
W Click [Apply] to apply the settings.  
The set value will be written into  
this product.  
X Remove the cable you connected  
in step .  
A
www.cnet.ie  
190  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
E-mail Address Book Data Format and Device Tag Information  
E-mail Address Book Data Format and  
Device Tag Information  
This section describes the data format of CSV files that are exported by selecting  
[Entered Program Information] and [Device Tag Information ] using the Web Status  
Monitor. Read this section when you create or edit a CSV file for updating the  
address book of this machine.  
Reference  
For information about the procedures, see p.89 “To export the address data to  
a CSV file”.  
Entered Program Information  
The following table shows example contents of a CSV file that is exported from  
the address book (e-mail destination list) of this machine using the Web Status  
Monitor. You can use a CSV file created in this format, to update the address  
book data of this machine.  
Line 1 #Entered Program Information  
Line 2  
Line 3 #Obtained Date:16/04/2004 07:35:36  
Line 4 #Device Name:RNP7983AD  
#Format Version:3.1.1.0  
Line 5 #Address:192.168.0.133  
Line 6 #Program No.,Type,Name,Displayed Name,Freq.,Title 1,Title 2,Title 3,E-mail,Send-  
er,Password,User Code, Assigned Group  
Line 7  
Line 8  
[00001], [A], [Sam], [Sam], [1], [1], [6], [1], [Sam@company.com], [1], [], [], []  
[00002], [A], [Janei], [Jane], [1], [1], [4], [1], [Jane@company.com], [1], [], [], []  
Note  
❒ Lines 1 through 6 contain information obtained from this machine. When you  
want to update the address book of this machine using a CSV file, use an ex-  
ported CSV file and edit it, while leaving these lines as they are.  
11  
❒ Line 7 and subsequent lines include e-mail address information. For details,  
see “About the e-mail address information” below.  
❒ The default name of a CSV file that is exported using [Entered Program Informa-  
tion] is “<device name>_addr.csv”. When the When the <device name> of this  
machine is set to "RNP625C65", for example, the default file name becomes  
"RNP625C65_addr.csv".  
www.cnet.ie  
191  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendix  
About the e-mail address information  
The following example shows a set of values that constitute an e-mail address  
record. When you edit a CSV file for updating the address book data of this ma-  
chine, insert a line that is formatted in the following way per an e-mail address  
record into the file.  
Example of an e-mail address record:  
[00015], [A], [Edward], [Edward], [0], [1], [2], [3], [Edward@abcdefg.com], [1], [TExMTA==], [] []  
❖ [00015] : Program No.  
Indicates the number for the e-mail address.  
❖ [A] : Type  
The value of this item is fixed to "A". "A" indicates the e-mail address type is  
"user".  
❖ [Edward] : Name  
Indicates the e-mail address owner (user) name.  
❖ [Edward] : Key Display  
Indicates the name to appear on the control panel.  
❖ [0] : Frequently Used Title(s)  
Determines whether the e-mail address information is to be registered to the  
[Freq.] title.  
[0] : Registered [1] : Not registered  
❖ [1] : Title1  
This item is used only when you select “Japanese” as the display language of  
this machine.  
❖ [2] : Alphabet (Title2)  
Determines under which alphabetical title this e-mail address record belongs  
to.  
Title2 Convention:  
ABC=1,DEF=2,GHI=3,JLK=4,MNO=5,PQRS=6,TUV=7,WXYZ=8  
For example, [2] indicates “DEF” is selected for the alphabetical title of this  
record.  
11  
❖ [3] : Custom Title (Title3)  
Determines under which Custom Title this e-mail address record belongs to.  
Title3 Convention:  
1=1,2=2,3=3,4=4,5=5  
For example, [3] indicates “03” is selected for the Custom Title of this record.  
❖ [Edward@abcdefg.com] : E-mail Address  
Indicates the destination's e-mail address.  
www.cnet.ie  
192  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
E-mail Address Book Data Format and Device Tag Information  
❖ [1] : Register as Sender  
Determines whether the e-mail address is used not only as the destination but  
as the sender also.  
[0] : Not used as sender [1] : Used as sender  
❖ [TExMTA==] : Protected Password  
When an e-mail address record in the exported CSV file from this machine is  
password protected, the encrypted password appears like the one shown  
above.  
Note  
❒ When you update the address book of this machine using a CSV file, create  
the file with its password entries are all left blank. You can set a sender’s  
password for each of the e-mail addresses after you have imported the  
CSV file, by selecting an e-mail address and clicking [Change] button inside  
the [E-mail Address] screen (which you can display from [Configuration] → [E-  
mail Settings] → [E-mail Address] ) on the Web Status Monitor.  
Note  
❒ The last two items (shown as “ [], [] ” in the example) are fixed to blank for  
this machine.  
Device Tag Information  
The following table shows an example of the Device Tag Information, which  
contains the title information of this machine. You can export the Device Tag In-  
formation to a CSV file using the Web Status Monitor.  
Line 1  
Line 2 #Obtained Date:16/04/2004 07:36:14  
Line 3 #Device Name:RNP7983AD  
#Device Tag Information  
Line 4 #Address:192.168.0.133  
Line 5 #Program Frequently Used Title(s),Off=0,On=1,  
Line 6 Program Title 1,,  
Line 7 Program Title 2,ABC=1,DEF=2,GHI=3,JKL=4,MNO=5,PQRS=6,TUV=7,WXYZ=8,  
Line 8 Program Title 3,1=1,2=2,3=3,4=4,5=5,  
11  
Note  
❒ You can use the Device Tag Information file only for your reference. It cannot  
be imported to this machine.  
❒ The default name of a CSV file that is exported using [Device Tag Information ]  
is “<device name>_taginfo.csv”.  
www.cnet.ie  
193  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
How File Size Changes Depending on  
Scan Area and Resolution  
Scan area and resolution determine the file size of a scanned data. The following  
general rules apply:  
• Doubling the scan area doubles the file size.  
• Doubling the resolution (dpi) quadruples the file size.  
• Setting higher resolution makes available scan area smaller, while setting  
larger scan area lowers available resolution.  
When Using this Machine as a Network TWAIN Scanner  
The following tables show file sizes in accordance with the scan area and reso-  
lution settings, when scanning is performed by using this machine as a network  
TWAIN scanner.  
Note  
❒ In the following tables, each of the values inside of white cells display the data  
size in KB, determined by the scan area to the left and the resolution at the top.  
❒ The following tables show file sizes without compression.  
❒ Actual file sizes may vary depending on the file type setting (single page, PDF  
or multi-page TIFF).  
❒ A “-” in a cell means that the combination of the relevant settings is not avail-  
able.  
❒ Even when a file size is shown in a cell, it may happen that you cannot per-  
form a scanning operation with the relevant settings due to the limitation of  
the TWAIN-compliant application you use for scanning. For information  
about the maximum file size that the application can handle, see the manual  
that comes with the application.  
11  
www.cnet.ie  
194  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
How File Size Changes Depending on Scan Area and Resolution  
When [Binary] or [Halftone] is selected  
11  
www.cnet.ie  
195  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
When [Gray-scale] is selected  
11  
www.cnet.ie  
196  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
How File Size Changes Depending on Scan Area and Resolution  
When [Gray-scale] is selected  
11  
www.cnet.ie  
197  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
When [256 colors] is selected  
11  
www.cnet.ie  
198  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
How File Size Changes Depending on Scan Area and Resolution  
When [16770K colors] is selected  
When Using this Machine for Sending Scan Data  
The following tables show file sizes in accordance with the scan area and reso-  
lution settings, when scanning is performed using Scan to E-mail, Scan to File  
(SMB/FTP), or the delivery server function.  
Note  
❒ In the following tables, each of the values inside of white cells display the data  
size in KB, determined by the scan area to the left and the resolution at the top.  
❒ The following tables show file sizes without compression.  
❒ Actual file sizes may vary depending on the file type setting (single page, PDF  
11  
or multi-page TIFF).  
❒ A “×” in a cell means that the combination of the relevant settings is not avail-  
able.  
❒ A “” in a cell means that the combination of the relevant settings is available  
only when you perform scanning with a compression setting.  
www.cnet.ie  
199  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendix  
When [Black and White: Text], [Black and White: Text/Photo] or [Black and White:  
Photo] is selected  
When [Black and White: Gray Scale] is selected  
11  
www.cnet.ie  
200  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
How File Size Changes Depending on Scan Area and Resolution  
When [Color: Full Color] is selected  
11  
www.cnet.ie  
201  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
Options  
❖ Function Expansion Board  
• Image Processing Unit Type A  
Enables highly advanced image processing such as automatic 2-value con-  
version processing and automatic image area separation.  
❖ Special Table  
• Table Type 7100  
Provides comfortable installation of this machine.  
❖ Wireless LAN Card  
• 802.11b Interface Unit Type B A  
Provides wireless connection to a network. This card is enabled by insert-  
ing into the PC Card slot on the rear panel of this machine.  
11  
www.cnet.ie  
202  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Specifications  
Specifications  
Type:  
Desktop flatbed colour scanner  
Scanning method  
Fixed document scanning and moving document scan-  
ning  
Scanning area  
•
Exposure Glass  
•
ADF  
Main direction :  
300mm (11.8”) Max.  
Sub-direction :  
Main direction:  
297mm (11.7”) Max.  
Sub-direction:  
2000mm (78.7”) Max.  
(when scanning in bina-  
ry)  
432mm (17.0”) Max.  
630mm (24.8”) Max.  
(when scanning in col-  
our or gray scale)  
Resolution  
Main scanning: 600dpi  
Sub scanning: 600dpi  
Scanning grade  
Input: 12 bit per colour/pixel  
Output: 8 bit per colour/pixel  
Colour  
Output: RGB, sRGB  
Scanning time  
Binary: 0.605msec/line  
Colour: 1.815msec/line  
Interface  
Network  
connection  
Ethernet interface × 1  
(10BASE-T or 100BASE-TX)  
Function  
expansion  
Type II PC card slot × 1(One of the slots is used exclu-  
sively for the USB interface card (USB 2.0) that comes  
with this machine.), SD card slot × 1  
Control  
Display panel  
240 x 64 pixels, STN liquid crystal  
(4-line monochrome display)  
Operation keys  
Number keys, 4 function keys, cursor keys (left/right),  
Start, Clear/Stop, Scanner Features, Reset, #, *  
Display  
language  
Japanese, English, German, French, Spanish, Portu-  
guese, Dutch, Italian  
Memory  
RAM: 128MB (64 MB is used for image processing)  
11  
Self diagnosis function  
Automatically turns the power off and back on, when a  
system freeze of the machine has occurred.  
Main features  
•
•
•
•
•
•
Supports network TWAIN driver  
Scan to Print  
Scan to E-mail  
Scan to Folder (SMB)  
Scan to FTP  
Delivery Server  
Life of flatbed  
5 years  
www.cnet.ie  
203  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
Operating environment  
Power  
Temperature: 10-32 °C (50-89.6 °F), humidity 15-80%  
220-240V, 50/60Hz 1A  
Power consumption  
During operation: 140W  
During standby: 60W  
During Low Power mode: 12W  
Warm-up time  
Max. 40 seconds  
Transition time to the low power  
mode  
About 15 minutes after the last operation or the end of  
the last scan job  
Dimensions  
590x647x265mm (23.2”x25.5”x10.4”)(WxDxH)  
(including the ADF and control panel)  
Weight  
Approximately 29kg (63.9lb)  
11  
www.cnet.ie  
204  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Software Information  
Software Information  
3. All advertising materials mentioning  
features or use of this software must  
display the following acknowledge-  
ment:  
GPL/LGPL Application  
Software  
This product includes software de-  
veloped by the University of Cali-  
fornia, Berkeley and its  
The software included in this product  
is software applying GPL/LGPL.  
Customers who use or purchase this  
product have rights to obtain, modify  
or redistribute the source code for the  
applicable software. If you wish to  
obtain the GPL/LGPL application  
source code used in this product,  
please access http://www.ricoh  
.com/support/linux/.  
contributors.  
4. Neither the name of the University nor  
the names of its contributors may be  
used to endorse or promote products  
derived from this software without spe-  
cific prior written permission.  
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY  
THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBU-  
TORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS  
OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, IN-  
CLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,  
THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF  
MERCHANTABILITY AND FIT-  
NESS FOR A PARTICULAR PUR-  
POSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO  
EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR  
CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR  
ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCI-  
DENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY,  
OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES  
(INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED  
TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTI-  
TUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS  
OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR  
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOW-  
EVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THE-  
ORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN  
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY,  
OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLI-  
GENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING  
IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF  
THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF AD-  
VISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF  
SUCH DAMAGE.  
BSD License Application  
Software  
This product includes software devel-  
oped by the University of California,  
Berkeley and its contributors.  
Copyright (c) 1985, 1989, 1990 The Re-  
gents of the University of California.  
All rights reserved.  
Redistribution and use in source and  
binary forms, with or without modifi-  
cation, are permitted provided that  
the following conditions are met:  
1. Redistributions of source code must re-  
tain the above copyright notice, this list  
of conditions and the following dis-  
claimer.  
11  
2. Redistributions in binary form must re-  
produce the above copyright notice,  
this list of conditions and the following  
disclaimer in the documentation  
and/or other materials provided with  
the distribution.  
www.cnet.ie  
205  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
       
Appendix  
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS  
IS" AND ANY EXPRESSED OR IM-  
PLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUD-  
ING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE  
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MER-  
CHANTABILITY AND FITNESS  
FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE  
ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT  
SHALL THE APACHE SOFTWARE  
FOUNDATION OR ITS CONTRIBU-  
TORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DI-  
RECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL,  
SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CON-  
SEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (IN-  
CLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,  
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE  
GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF  
USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSI-  
NESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER  
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY  
OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CON-  
TRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR  
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE  
OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY  
WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS  
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF  
THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAM-  
AGE.  
The Apache Software License  
Application Software  
This product includes software devel-  
oped by the Apache Software Foun-  
dation (http://www.apache.org/).  
The Apache Software License, Ver-  
sion 1.1  
Copyright (c) 2000 The Apache Soft-  
ware Foundation. All rights reserved.  
Redistribution and use in source and  
binary forms, with or without modifi-  
cation, are permitted provided that  
the following conditions are met:  
1. Redistributions of source code must re-  
tain the above copyright notice, this list  
of conditions and the following dis-  
claimer.  
2. Redistributions in binary form must re-  
produce the above copyright notice,  
this list of conditions and the following  
disclaimer in the documentation  
and/or other materials provided with  
the distribution.  
3. The end-user documentation included  
with the redistribution, if any, must in-  
clude the following acknowledgment:  
"This product includes software de-  
veloped by the Apache Software  
Foundation (ht-  
tp://www.apache.org/)."  
Alternately, this acknowledgment may  
appear in the software itself, if and  
wherever such third-party acknowl-  
edgments normally appear.  
11  
4. The names "Apache" and "Apache Soft-  
ware Foundation" must not be used to  
endorse or promote products derived  
from this software without prior writ-  
ten permission. For written permission,  
please contact apache@apache.org.  
5. Products derived from this software  
may not be called "Apache", nor may  
"Apache" appear in their name, without  
prior written permission of the Apache  
Software Foundation.  
www.cnet.ie  
206  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Software Information  
(2) If only executable code is distributed,  
then the accompanying documenta-  
tion must state that "this software is  
based in part on the work of the Inde-  
pendent JPEG Group".  
JPEG Software  
This software is based in part on the  
work of the Independent JPEG  
Group.  
(3) Permission for use of this software is  
granted only if the user accepts full re-  
sponsibility for any undesirable con-  
sequences; the authors accept NO  
In plain English:  
1. We don't promise that this software  
works. (But if you find any bugs, please  
let us know!)  
LIABILITY for damages of any kind.  
These conditions apply to any soft-  
ware derived from or based on the  
IJG code, not just to the unmodified li-  
brary. If you use our work, you ought  
to acknowledge us.  
2. You can use this software for whatever  
you want. You don't have to pay us.  
3. You may not pretend that you wrote  
this software. If you use it in a program,  
you must acknowledge somewhere in  
your documentation that you've used  
the IJG code.  
Permission is NOT granted for the  
use of any IJG author's name or com-  
pany name in advertising or publicity  
relating to this software or products  
derived from it. This software may be  
referred to only as "the Independent  
JPEG Group's software".  
In legalese:  
The authors make NO WARRANTY  
or representation, either express or  
implied, with respect to this software,  
its quality, accuracy, merchantability,  
or fitness for a particular purpose.  
This software is provided "AS IS",  
and you, its user, assume the entire  
risk as to its quality and accuracy.  
We specifically permit and encourage  
the use of this software as the basis of  
commercial products, provided that  
all warranty or liability claims are as-  
sumed by the product vendor.  
This software is copyright (C) 1991-  
1998, Thomas G. Lane.  
ansi2knr.c is included in this distribu-  
tion by permission of L. Peter Deut-  
sch, sole proprietor of its copyright  
holder, Aladdin Enterprises of Menlo  
Park, CA. ansi2knr.c is NOT covered  
by the above copyright and condi-  
tions, but instead by the usual distri-  
bution terms of the Free Software  
Foundation; principally, that you  
must include source code if you redis-  
tribute it. (See the file ansi2knr.c for  
full details.) However, since  
ansi2knr.c is not needed as part of any  
program generated from the IJG code,  
this does not limit you more than the  
foregoing paragraphs do.  
All Rights Reserved except as speci-  
fied below.  
Permission is hereby granted to use,  
copy, modify, and distribute this soft-  
ware (or portions thereof) for any  
purpose, without fee, subject to these  
conditions:  
11  
(1) If any part of the source code for this  
software is distributed, then this RE-  
ADME file must be included, with this  
copyright and no-warranty notice un-  
altered; and any additions, deletions,  
or changes to the original files must be  
clearly indicated in accompanying  
documentation.  
www.cnet.ie  
207  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
Appendix  
The Unix configuration script "config-  
ure" was produced with GNU Auto-  
conf. It is copyright by the Free  
Software Foundation but is freely dis-  
tributable. The same holds for its sup-  
porting scripts (config. guess, config.  
sub, ltconfig, ltmain. sh). Another  
support script, install-sh, is copyright  
by M. I. T. but is also freely distribut-  
able.  
TIFF Software  
Copyright (c) 1988-1997 Sam Leffler  
Copyright (c) 1991-1997 Silicon  
Graphics, Inc.  
Permission to use, copy, modify, dis-  
tribute, and sell this software and its  
documentation for any purpose is  
hereby granted without fee, provided  
that (i) the above copyright notices  
and this permission notice appear in  
all copies of the software and related  
documentation, and (ii) the names of  
Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may  
not be used in any advertising or pub-  
licity relating to the software without  
the specific, prior written permission  
of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics.  
It appears that the arithmetic coding  
option of the JPEG spec is covered by  
patents owned by IBM, AT&T, and  
Mitsubishi. Hence arithmetic coding  
cannot legally be used without ob-  
taining one or more licenses. For this  
reason, support for arithmetic coding  
has been removed from the free JPEG  
software. (Since arithmetic coding  
provides only a marginal gain over  
the unpatented Huffman mode, it is  
unlikely that very many implementa-  
tions will support it. ) So far as we are  
aware, there are no patent restrictions  
on the remaining code.  
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS-  
IS" AND WITHOUT WARRANTY  
OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS, IMPLIED  
OR OTHERWISE, INCLUDING  
WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY  
WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABIL-  
ITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICU-  
LAR PURPOSE.  
The IJG distribution formerly includ-  
ed code to read and write GIF files. To  
avoid entanglement with the Unisys  
LZW patent, GIF reading support has  
been removed altogether, and the GIF  
writer has been simplified to produce  
"uncompressed GIFs". This technique  
does not use the LZW algorithm; the  
resulting GIF files are larger than usu-  
al, but are readable by all standard  
GIF decoders.  
IN NO EVENT SHALL SAM LEF-  
FLER OR SILICON GRAPHICS BE  
LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, INCI-  
DENTAL, INDIRECT OR CONSE-  
QUENTIAL DAMAGES OF ANY  
KIND, OR ANY DAMAGES WHAT-  
SOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS  
OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS,  
WHETHER OR NOT ADVISED OF  
THE POSSIBILITY OF DAMAGE,  
AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABIL-  
ITY, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CON-  
NECTION WITH THE USE OR  
PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFT-  
WARE.  
We are required to state that  
11  
"The Graphics Interchange Format(c) is  
the Copyright property of CompuServe  
Incorporated. GIF(sm) is a Service Mark  
property of CompuServe Incorporated.  
"
www.cnet.ie  
208  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Software Information  
-- Part 2: Networks Associates Tech-  
nology, Inc copyright notice (BSD) --  
UCD-SNMP Software  
Copyright © 2001, Networks Associ-  
ates Technology, Inc  
-- Part 1: CMU/UCD copyright no-  
tice: (BSD like) --  
All rights reserved.  
Copyright 1989, 1991, 1992 by Carne-  
gie Mellon University  
Redistribution and use in source and  
binary forms, with or without modifi-  
cation, are permitted provided that  
the following conditions are met:  
Derivative Work - 1996, 1998-2000  
Copyright 1996, 1998-2000 The Re-  
gents of the University of California  
• Redistributions of source code  
must retain the above copyright  
notice, this list of conditions and  
the following disclaimer.  
All Rights Reserved  
Permission to use, copy, modify and  
distribute this software and its docu-  
mentation for any purpose and with-  
out fee is hereby granted, provided  
that the above copyright notice ap-  
pears in all copies and that both that  
copyright notice and this permission  
notice appear in supporting docu-  
mentation, and that the name of CMU  
and The Regents of the University of  
California not be used in advertising  
or publicity pertaining to distribution  
of the software without specific writ-  
ten permission.  
• Redistributions in binary form  
must reproduce the above copy-  
right notice, this list of conditions  
and the following disclaimer in the  
documentation and/or other ma-  
terials provided with the distribu-  
tion.  
• Neither the name of the NAI Labs  
nor the names of its contributors  
may be used to endorse or pro-  
mote products derived from this  
software without specific prior  
written permission.  
CMU AND THE REGENTS OF THE  
UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA DIS-  
CLAIM ALL WARRANTIES WITH  
REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE, IN-  
CLUDING ALL IMPLIED WAR-  
RANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY  
AND FITNESS. IN NO EVENT  
SHALL CMU OR THE REGENTS OF  
THE UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA  
BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, IN-  
DIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL  
DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES  
WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM  
THE LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROF-  
ITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF  
CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR  
OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARIS-  
ING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION  
WITH THE USE OR PERFORM-  
ANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE.  
11  
www.cnet.ie  
209  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix  
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY  
THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND  
CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY  
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRAN-  
TIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMIT-  
ED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES  
OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FIT-  
NESS FOR A PARTICULAR PUR-  
POSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO  
EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT  
HOLDERS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE  
LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDI-  
RECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EX-  
EMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL  
DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT  
LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF  
SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES;  
LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS;  
OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)  
HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY  
THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER  
IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY,  
OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLI-  
GENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING  
IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF  
THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF AD-  
VISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF  
SUCH DAMAGE.  
• The name of Cambridge Broad-  
band Ltd. may not be used to en-  
dorse or promote products  
derived from this software with-  
out specific prior written permis-  
sion.  
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY  
THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER "AS IS"  
AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED  
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT  
NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED  
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABIL-  
ITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICU-  
LAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.  
IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPY-  
RIGHT HOLDER BE LIABLE FOR  
ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDEN-  
TAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR  
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (IN-  
CLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO,  
PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE  
GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE,  
DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS  
INTERRUPTION)  
HOWEVER  
CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF  
LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CON-  
TRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT  
(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR  
OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY  
OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFT-  
WARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE  
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.  
-- Part 3: Cambridge Broadband Ltd.  
copyright notice (BSD) --  
Portions of this code are copyright ©  
2001, Cambridge Broadband Ltd..  
All rights reserved.  
Redistribution and use in source and  
binary forms, with or without modifi-  
cation, are permitted provided that  
the following conditions are met:  
11  
• Redistributions of source code  
must retain the above copyright  
notice, this list of conditions and  
the following disclaimer.  
• Redistributions in binary form  
must reproduce the above copy-  
right notice, this list of conditions  
and the following disclaimer in the  
documentation and/or other ma-  
terials provided with the distribu-  
www.cnet.ie  
tion.  
210  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Software Information  
MD5 Software License  
Agreement  
Expat  
Copyright © 1998, 1999, 2000 Thai  
Open Source Software Center Ltd.  
and Clark Cooper  
Copyright (C) 1991-2, RSA Data Secu-  
rity, Inc. Created 1991. All rights re-  
served.  
Copyright © 2001, 2002 Expat main-  
tainers.  
License to copy and use this software  
is granted provided that it is identi-  
fied as the "RSA Data Security, Inc.  
MD5 Message-Digest Algorithm" in  
all material mentioning or referenc-  
ing this software or this function.  
Permission is hereby granted, free of  
charge, to any person obtaining a  
copy of this software and associated  
documentation files (the "Software"),  
to deal in the Software without re-  
striction, including without limitation  
the rights to use, copy, modify,  
merge, publish, distribute, subli-  
cense, and/or sell copies of the Soft-  
ware, and to permit persons to whom  
the Software is furnished to do so,  
subject to the following conditions:  
License is also granted to make and  
use derivative works provided that  
such works are identified as "derived  
from the RSA Data Security, Inc. MD5  
Message-Digest Algorithm" in all ma-  
terial mentioning or referencing the  
derived work.  
The above copyright notice and this  
permission notice shall be included in  
all copies or substantial portions of  
the Software.  
RSA Data Security, Inc. makes no rep-  
resentations concerning either the  
merchantability of this software or  
the suitability of this software for any  
particular purpose. It is provided "as  
is" without express or implied war-  
ranty of any kind.  
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS  
IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF  
ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,  
INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED  
TO THE WARRANTIES OF MER-  
CHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A  
PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND  
NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO  
EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR  
COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE  
FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR  
OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN  
AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT  
OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM,  
OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION  
WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE  
USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE  
SOFTWARE.  
These notices must be retained in any  
copies of any part of this documenta-  
tion and/or software.  
11  
www.cnet.ie  
211  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
   
INDEX  
A
S
ADF, 13  
Apache License, 206  
Scanned Image Files Sent to FTP Servers, 152  
Scanned Image Files Sent to Shared  
Folders, 147  
B
Scanning Mode Registration, 122  
Scanning Originals, 120  
Selecting a File Name, 142  
Selecting an FTP Server, 150  
Selecting an SMB, 140  
BSD License, 205  
C
Selecting a Sender, 134  
Selecting a Shared Folder, 140  
Selecting a Subject, 130  
Caution, 2  
Checking Transmission Results, 137  
Selecting Cc Destinations, 130  
E
Selecting Delivery Destinations, 156  
Selecting Destinations, 128  
Selecting destinations  
Ridoc Document Router/Pro/Lt, 156  
Sending scanned image files (FTP), 150  
Sending scanned image files (SMB), 140  
Selecting Destinations and a Subject  
E-mail, 128  
Sender, 124  
Sending a Scanned File to a Registered  
Shared Folder  
Procedure Breakdown, 139  
Sending scanned image files (FTP)  
File names, 152  
E-mail  
Procedure Breakdown, 123  
E-mail content, 124  
F
File Names  
Sending scanned image files (FTP), 152  
Sending scanned image files (SMB)  
File names without time, 148, 153  
File names with time, 147, 152  
,
147  
J
Sending scanned image files (SMB), 140  
File names, 147  
JPEG License, 207  
Sending scanned image files to  
unregistered shared folders  
Procedure Breakdown, 143  
SSID, 189  
M
Making Scan Settings, 132  
O
Starting a Scan Operation, 135  
Operating Instructions, 4  
Original location, 126  
Original Orientation and Scanning Sides 126  
T
,
To start with originals in the ADF, 135  
TWAIN, 7, 119  
P
U
Performing Scan Operation, 135  
Printing to the image, 122  
Using the Enter Custom Send File  
function, 144  
Q
W
Quick Installation Guide, 4  
Warning, 2  
www.cnet.ie  
212  
GB  
GB  
G421-8601  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Declaration of Conformity  
“The Product complies with the requirements of the EMC Directive 89/336/EEC and its amending di-  
rectives and the Low Voltage Directive 73/23/EEC and its amending directives.”  
In accordance with IEC 60417, this machine uses the following symbols for the main power switch:  
a means POWER ON.  
b means POWER OFF.  
www.cnet.ie  
Copyright © 2004  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
www.cnet.ie  
GB GB G421-8601  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Coleman Tent 2000001592 User Manual
Cornelius Beverage Dispenser 326142000 User Manual
Craftsman Lawn Aerator 757243481 User Manual
Craftsman Trimmer 35879105 User Manual
Cub Cadet Lawn Mower 108C User Manual
Curtis TV DVD Combo TVD2000 User Manual
Dualit Microwave Oven UK 06 05 User Manual
Electro Voice Speaker System Sb122 User Manual
Estate Garage Door Opener E SC 1102 User Manual
Extron electronic Speaker CS 120P User Manual